WO2022017250A1 - 用于波束训练的方法和装置 - Google Patents

用于波束训练的方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022017250A1
WO2022017250A1 PCT/CN2021/106454 CN2021106454W WO2022017250A1 WO 2022017250 A1 WO2022017250 A1 WO 2022017250A1 CN 2021106454 W CN2021106454 W CN 2021106454W WO 2022017250 A1 WO2022017250 A1 WO 2022017250A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
codewords
reference signals
codeword
indication information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/106454
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
何泓利
李雪茹
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP21846010.3A priority Critical patent/EP4178294A4/en
Priority to JP2023504006A priority patent/JP7516655B2/ja
Priority to US18/006,053 priority patent/US20230283337A1/en
Priority to CN202180027892.2A priority patent/CN115516964B/zh
Publication of WO2022017250A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022017250A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602—Signal structure
    • H04L27/261—Details of reference signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08—Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • H04W72/542—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using measured or perceived quality
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/005—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of common pilots, i.e. pilots destined for multiple users or terminals

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to methods and apparatus for beam training in the field of communications.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a method and apparatus for beam training, which can enable a second device to determine a beam.
  • a method for beam training may be performed by a first device, and the first device may be an apparatus capable of supporting the functions required by the first device to implement the method, such as a chip system.
  • the first device receives first configuration information for beam training, the first configuration information configures L codewords associated with M reference signals, and each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords at least one of the codewords, the M and the L are positive integers;
  • the first device sends first indication information, where the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the first indication information is the Determined by the first device according to the measurements of the M reference signals and the L codewords.
  • the first device receives the first configuration information for beam training, and can determine L codewords associated with the M reference signals according to the first configuration information, and the first device can measure the M reference signals, and according to the measurement As a result, V codewords are determined among the L codewords, and the first indication information indicating the V codewords is reported. In this way, the device receiving the first indication information can determine the effective beams according to the V codewords.
  • the L codewords correspond to the L beams
  • the device receiving the first indication information has the correspondence between the L codewords and the L beams. In this way, the device receiving the first indication information can determine according to the V codewords. There are V effective beams, and the V effective beams are different from each other or some of the beams are the same. The device receiving the first indication information may further screen the beams for transmitting the signal among the V effective beams.
  • the beams mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are: the beams through which the second device sends signals to the first device, that is, the sending beams of the second device.
  • the first device may measure some or all of the M reference signals to determine the first indication information.
  • the M reference signals may also be configured by the first configuration information or configured by other configuration information different from the first configuration information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first configuration information can configure either M reference signals and L codewords associated with the M reference signals, or only L codewords associated with the M reference signals, and the M reference signals are other The configuration information is configured.
  • the M reference signals are in one-to-one correspondence with the M groups of beams.
  • the first configuration information includes M first fields, and the M first fields are respectively used to carry the codewords associated with the M reference signals.
  • the M first fields included in the first configuration information are respectively used to carry code words associated with the M reference signals, so that the code words associated with the M reference signals can be directly carried through the M first fields.
  • the first configuration information includes a field carrying the codeword associated with each reference signal.
  • the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, specifically: :
  • the first indication information indicates V codes in the L codewords words, specifically:
  • the first indication information indicates an index of the W reference signals, and an index of a codeword associated with each of the W reference signals, wherein the wth reference signal in the W reference signals an index associated with v w codewords, the W reference signals are reference signals of the M reference signals, v w is a positive integer, and
  • one reference signal may be bundled with a group of beams, the first indication information indicates the indices of the W reference signals, and the codeword index associated with each of the W reference signals, and the first indication information is received.
  • a device with indication information can determine W groups of beams according to the W reference signals, and can determine V effective beams in the W groups of beams according to the codeword index associated with each reference signal.
  • W is less than V, and there is one vw greater than 1, that is, there is more than one effective beam in a group of beams
  • the device receiving the first indication information can determine W groups of beams according to the indices of the W reference signals. If v w corresponding to the reference signal is greater than 1, the device receiving the first indication information determines multiple effective beams in a group of beams corresponding to the reference signal according to the indices of the v w codewords.
  • the method further includes: the first device sends third indication information, and the The third indication information indicates at least one of first amplitude information or first energy information corresponding to the V codewords.
  • the device receiving the third indication information may determine the gain of the effective beam according to at least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information corresponding to the V codewords.
  • the mth reference signal of the M reference signals includes two ports, so the The first device measures the mth reference signal according to the following assumptions:
  • the transmission signal of the first port of the two ports is determined according to s 1 ; and/or,
  • s 1 and s 2 are complex numbers determined according to the reference signal sequences of the two ports.
  • association between t i and the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal can be understood as: t i is the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal or the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal. the i-th codeword in the form of the relevant T i.
  • the mth reference signal includes two ports, and it can be understood that the mth reference signal occupies the resources of the two ports, and signals sent by using multiple beams on the two ports together form a reference signal.
  • the first device can measure multiple beams according to the measurement result of one reference signal received on two port resources, thereby saving resource overhead.
  • the first configuration information includes the mth reference in the M reference signals codewords associated with the number of R & lt signal m, the m R & lt configuration of the associated reference signal R & lt m m codewords, R & lt m is a positive integer less than or equal to L, m is a positive integer smaller than or equal to m,
  • the number of code words has a corresponding relationship with the code words
  • the first device determines the code words according to the number of code words configured by the first configuration information.
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the ninth possible implementation manner is specifically:
  • the R m and the reference signal number M are used to determine the R m codewords associated with the mth reference signal.
  • the R m and the reference signal quantity M are used to determine the codeword associated with the mth reference signal, Specifically:
  • the form of the codeword may be in the form of a row vector or in the form of a column vector, that is, the i-th codeword in the R m codewords is in the form of B ⁇ [1;t i ], or, B ⁇ [1, t i ], where B is a complex constant.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L reference signals
  • At least one codeword in the codewords specifically:
  • the M reference signals there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords in the L codewords.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L reference signals At least one of the codewords is different. In other words, at least one codeword associated with each reference signal does not have the same codeword, so that a group of beams associated with one reference signal can be distinguished by different codewords.
  • the M reference signals are M channel state information reference signals (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS).
  • a method for training a beam can be performed by a first device, and the first device can be a device, such as a chip system, capable of supporting the functions required by the first device to implement the method.
  • the first device receives second configuration information for beam training, the second configuration information configures L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords associated with M reference signals, each of the M reference signals refers to The signal is associated with at least one codeword in the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter in the L spatial filtering parameters, where M and L are positive integers;
  • the first device sends second indication information, where the second indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters in the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the second indication information is It is determined according to the measurement of the M reference signals by the first device, the L codewords, and the L spatial filtering parameters.
  • the L spatial filtering parameters are in one-to-one correspondence with the L codewords, and the L spatial filtering parameters are in one-to-one correspondence with the L beams.
  • the M reference signals may also be configured by the second configuration information or configured by other configuration information different from the second configuration information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the second configuration information can configure either M reference signals, L codewords and L spatial filtering parameters associated with the M reference signals, or only L codewords and L codewords associated with the M reference signals.
  • the L spatial filtering parameters and the M reference signals are configured by other configuration information.
  • the M reference signals are in one-to-one correspondence with the M groups of beams.
  • the first device receives the second configuration information for the training beam, and can determine the L spatial filtering parameters of the L codewords associated with the M reference signals according to the second configuration information, and the first device can measure M A reference signal is obtained, V spatial filtering parameters are determined according to the measurement results, and second indication information indicating the V spatial filtering parameters is reported. In this way, the device receiving the second indication information can determine the effective beam according to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • the first device may measure some or all of the M reference signals to determine the second indication information.
  • the second configuration information includes M second fields, and the M second fields are respectively used to carry the The M reference signals configure associated spatial filtering parameters and associated codewords.
  • the M second fields included in the first configuration information are respectively used to carry the codewords and spatial filtering parameters associated with the M reference signals, so that the codewords and spatial filtering parameters associated with the M reference signals can be directly It is carried by M first fields.
  • the method further includes: the first device sending fourth indication information to the second device , the fourth indication information indicates at least one of the second amplitude information or the second energy information corresponding to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • the device receiving the fourth indication information may determine the gain of the effective beam according to at least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information corresponding to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • the mth reference signal of the M reference signals includes two ports, so The first device measures the mth reference signal according to the following assumptions:
  • s 1 and s 2 are complex numbers determined according to the reference signal sequences of the two ports, and b i is the i-th spatial filtering parameter associated with the m-th reference signal.
  • association between t i and the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal can be understood as: t i is the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal or the i-th codeword of the m-th reference signal. the i-th codeword in the form of the relevant T i.
  • b i is a spatial filtering parameter corresponding to the i-th beam associated with the m-th reference signal.
  • the mth reference signal includes two ports, and it can be understood that the mth reference signal occupies the resources of the two ports, and signals sent by using multiple beams on the two ports together form a reference signal.
  • the first device can measure multiple beams according to the measurement result of one reference signal received on two port resources, thereby saving resource overhead.
  • the second configuration information includes the mth reference in the M reference signals
  • the number of codewords associated with the signal and the number of associated spatial filtering parameters Rm where Rm configures the Rm codewords associated with the mth reference signal, Rm is a positive integer less than or equal to L, m is a positive integer less than or equal to M,
  • the number of code words has a corresponding relationship with the code words
  • the first device determines the code words according to the number of code words configured by the first configuration information.
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m and the reference signal number M are used to determine the R m codewords associated with the mth reference signal.
  • the R m and the reference signal quantity M are used to determine the codeword associated with the mth reference signal, Specifically:
  • the codeword may be in the form of a row vector or a column vector, that is, the i-th codeword in the R m codewords is in the form of B ⁇ [1; t i ], or, B ⁇ [1, t i ], where B is a complex constant.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords At least one codeword in , specifically:
  • the M reference signals there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords in the L codewords.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codes At least one codeword of the words is different. In other words, at least one codeword associated with each reference signal does not have the same codeword, so that a group of beams associated with one reference signal can be distinguished by different codewords.
  • the M reference signals are M CSI-RSs.
  • a method for training a beam may be performed by a second device, and the second device may be an apparatus capable of supporting the functions required by the second device to implement the method, such as a chip system.
  • the second device sends first configuration information for beam training, the first configuration information configures L codewords associated with M reference signals, and each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords at least one of the codewords, where M and L are positive integers;
  • the second device receives first indication information, where the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the first indication information is the The first device is determined by the measurement of the M reference signals and the L codewords.
  • the L codewords correspond to the L beams
  • the second device has the correspondence between the L codewords and the L beams.
  • the second device can determine the V valid codes according to the V codewords in the first indication information. Beams, V effective beams are different or some of the beams are the same.
  • the second device may further screen the beams for transmitting the signal among the V effective beams.
  • the first configuration information includes M first fields, and the M first fields are respectively used to carry the codewords associated with the M reference signals.
  • the M first fields included in the first configuration information are respectively used to carry code words associated with the M reference signals, so that the code words associated with the M reference signals can be directly carried through the M first fields.
  • the first configuration information includes a field carrying the codeword associated with each reference signal.
  • the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, specifically: :
  • the first indication information includes the indices of the V codewords, and the index of the i-th codeword associated with the m-th reference signal among the M reference signals is: or
  • the first indication information indicates V codes in the L codewords words, specifically:
  • the first indication information indicates an index of the W reference signals, and an index of a codeword associated with each of the W reference signals, wherein the wth reference signal in the W reference signals an index associated with v w codewords, the W reference signals are reference signals of the M reference signals, v w is a positive integer, and
  • the method further includes: the second device receives the third indication information, and the The third indication information indicates at least one of first amplitude information or first energy information corresponding to the V codewords.
  • the mth reference signal of the M reference signals includes two ports, so the The second device sends the mth reference signal according to the following criteria:
  • the transmission signal of the first port of the two ports is determined according to s 1 ; and/or,
  • the first configuration information includes the mth reference in the M reference signals codewords associated with the number of R & lt signal m, the m R & lt configuration of the associated reference signal R & lt m m codewords, R & lt m is a positive integer less than or equal to L, m is a positive integer smaller than or equal to m,
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m and the reference signal number M are used to determine the R m codewords associated with the mth reference signal.
  • the R m and the reference signal quantity M are used to determine the codeword associated with the mth reference signal, Specifically:
  • ⁇ m 2m ⁇ /Y
  • Y is a prime number greater than or equal to M and max m R m
  • the form of the codeword may be in the form of a row vector or in the form of a column vector, that is, the i-th codeword in the R m codewords is in the form of B ⁇ [1;t i ], or, B ⁇ [1, t i ], where B is a complex constant.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L reference signals
  • At least one codeword in the codewords specifically:
  • the M reference signals there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords in the L codewords.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L reference signals At least one of the codewords is different. In other words, at least one codeword associated with each reference signal does not have the same codeword, so that a group of beams associated with one reference signal can be distinguished by different codewords.
  • the M reference signals are M CSI-RSs.
  • a method for training a beam may be performed by a second device, and the second device may be an apparatus, such as a system-on-a-chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the second device to implement the method.
  • the second device may be an apparatus, such as a system-on-a-chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the second device to implement the method.
  • the second device sends second configuration information for beam training, where the second configuration information configures L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords associated with M reference signals, each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword in the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter in the L spatial filtering parameters, where M and L are positive integers;
  • the second device receives second indication information, where the second indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters among the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the second configuration information includes M second fields, and the M second fields are respectively used to carry the The M reference signals configure associated spatial filtering parameters and associated codewords.
  • the method further includes: the second device receives fourth indication information, the fourth indication The information indicates at least one of second amplitude information or second energy information corresponding to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • the mth reference signal of the M reference signals includes two ports, so the The second device sends the mth reference signal according to the following criteria:
  • the second configuration information includes the mth reference in the M reference signals m number of R & lt spatial filtering parameters m and R & lt associated number of codewords associated with the signal, the R & lt arranged m the m-th signal associated with the reference code word R & lt m, R & lt m is a positive integer less than or equal to L , m is a positive integer less than or equal to M,
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m configures the R m codewords associated with the m th reference signal, specifically:
  • the R m and the reference signal number M are used to determine the R m codewords associated with the mth reference signal.
  • the R m and the reference signal quantity M are used to determine the codeword associated with the mth reference signal, Specifically:
  • the codeword may be in the form of a row vector or a column vector, that is, the i-th codeword in the R m codewords is in the form of B ⁇ [1; t i ], or, B ⁇ [1, t i ], where B is a complex constant.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords At least one codeword in , specifically:
  • the M reference signals there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords in the L codewords.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with the L codes At least one codeword of the words is different. In other words, at least one codeword associated with each reference signal does not have the same codeword, so that a group of beams associated with one reference signal can be distinguished by different codewords.
  • the M reference signals are M CSI-RSs.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for training a beam
  • the apparatus is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of implementing the above-mentioned first aspect and the behavior of the first device in possible implementations of the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the apparatus may include a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, and the like.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for training a beam
  • the apparatus is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of implementing the above-mentioned second aspect and the behavior of the first device in possible implementations of the above-mentioned second aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the apparatus may include a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, and the like.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for training a beam
  • the apparatus is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of implementing the third aspect and the behavior of the second device in possible implementations of the third aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the apparatus may include a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, and the like.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for training a beam
  • the apparatus is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of implementing the fourth aspect and the behavior of the second device in possible implementations of the fourth aspect.
  • Functions can be implemented by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the apparatus may include a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, and the like.
  • a ninth aspect provides an apparatus for training a beam, the apparatus comprising a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used for storing computer programs or instructions, and the processor is used for executing the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the first The method in one aspect is executed.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform the method of the first aspect.
  • the apparatus includes one or more processors.
  • the apparatus may further include a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the device may include one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or provided separately.
  • the device may also include a transceiver.
  • a tenth aspect provides an apparatus for training a beam, the apparatus comprising a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used for storing computer programs or instructions, and the processor is used for executing the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the first The method in the second aspect is performed.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform the method of the second aspect.
  • the apparatus includes one or more processors.
  • the apparatus may further include a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the device may include one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or provided separately.
  • the device may also include a transceiver.
  • an apparatus for training a beam comprising a processor coupled to a memory for storing a computer program or instructions, the processor for executing the computer program or instructions stored in the memory such that The method of the third aspect is performed.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform the method of the third aspect.
  • the apparatus includes one or more processors.
  • the apparatus may further include a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the device may include one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or provided separately.
  • the device may also include a transceiver.
  • a twelfth aspect provides an apparatus for training a beam, the apparatus comprising a processor coupled to a memory for storing a computer program or instructions, the processor for executing the computer program or instructions stored in the memory such that The method of the fourth aspect is performed.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform the method of the fourth aspect.
  • the apparatus includes one or more processors.
  • the apparatus may further include a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the device may include one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or provided separately.
  • the device may also include a transceiver.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a system for training a beam, comprising: the apparatus of the fifth aspect and the seventh aspect; or the apparatus of the sixth aspect and the eighth aspect. Or include: the apparatus of the ninth aspect and the eleventh aspect; or include the apparatus of the tenth aspect and the twelfth aspect.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program (which may also be referred to as instructions or codes) for implementing the first aspect or the method in the first aspect is stored.
  • the computer program when executed by a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of the first aspect.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program (which may also be referred to as instructions or codes) for implementing the second aspect or the method in the second aspect is stored.
  • the computer program when executed by a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of the second aspect.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program (which may also be referred to as instructions or codes) for implementing the third aspect or the method in the third aspect is stored.
  • the computer program when executed by a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of the third aspect.
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program (which may also be referred to as instructions or codes) for implementing the fourth aspect or the method in the fourth aspect is stored.
  • the computer program when executed by a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of the fourth aspect.
  • the present application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is adapted to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of the first aspect and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is adapted to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of the second aspect and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of the third aspect and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of the fourth aspect and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program (also referred to as instructions or code) that, when executed by a computer, causes the computer to implement the various aspects. method.
  • a computer program also referred to as instructions or code
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a method for beam training provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a two-port resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of reference signal resources provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another reference signal resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another method for beam training provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of yet another reference signal resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another reference signal resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another method for beam training provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another reference signal resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for training a beam provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of another apparatus for training a beam provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be applied to various communication systems, for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system, a fifth generation mobile communication (the 5th Generation, 5G) system, and machine to machine (M2M) communication. system, sidelink communication system (Sidelink) or other communication systems evolved in the future, such as 6G systems.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication
  • M2M machine to machine
  • system sidelink communication system
  • 6G systems such as 6G systems.
  • NR new radio
  • 5G system may also be called an NR system.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an inter-device communication system 100 .
  • the wireless communication device may include one or more network devices, such as network device 110 in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal device 120 may communicate with the network device 110 , for example, in FIG. 1 , the network device 110 communicates with the terminal device 120 .
  • the link through which the terminal device 120 sends data to the network device 110 is called an uplink, and the link through which the terminal device 120 receives data sent by the network device 110 is called a downlink.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may further include other terminal devices, and the other terminal devices and the terminal device 120 may communicate directly.
  • the communication between terminal devices and terminal devices can be called vehicle-to-everything (V2X), or device-to-device (D2D), etc.
  • V2X communication can be regarded as a special case of D2D communication.
  • the new radio (NR) access technology is the current mainstream wireless communication technology. It can support V2X communication with lower latency and higher reliability in view of V2X service characteristics and new service requirements.
  • V2X is the foundation and key technology for realizing smart cars, autonomous driving, and intelligent transportation systems.
  • V2X can include vehicle to network (V2N), vehicle to vehicle (V2V), vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to pedestrian (V2P), etc.
  • V2N communication is the most widely used form of Internet of Vehicles at present. Its main function is to connect the vehicle to the cloud server through the mobile network, and use the navigation, entertainment, anti-theft and other application functions provided by the cloud server.
  • V2V communication can be used for information exchange and reminders between vehicles, and the most typical application is for collision avoidance safety systems between vehicles.
  • V2I communication vehicles can communicate with roads and even other infrastructure, such as traffic lights, roadblocks, etc., to obtain road management information such as traffic light signal timing.
  • V2P communication can be used for safety warnings to pedestrians or non-motor vehicles on the road.
  • the terminal device 120 may be fixed or movable.
  • FIG. 1 is just a schematic diagram, and the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the types and quantities of network devices and terminal devices included in the mobile communication system.
  • the terminal device 120 is wirelessly connected to the network device in the mobile communication system.
  • the network device 110 may be: a base station, an evolved node B (eNB), a home base station, an access point (AP) in a wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WIFI) system, a wireless relay node, A wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be a gNB in the NR system, or can also be a component or part of a device that constitutes a base station, such as Convergence unit (central unit, CU), distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) or baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU) and so on.
  • Convergence unit central unit, CU
  • distributed unit distributed unit
  • DU baseband unit
  • BBU baseband unit
  • the terminal device 120 in the mobile communication system 100 may also be referred to as a terminal, a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (mobile station, MS), a mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), and the like.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, and may also be applied to virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR) ), industrial control, self driving, remote medical, smart grid, transportation safety, smart city and smart home ) in scenarios such as wireless terminals.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • the aforementioned terminal devices and chips applicable to the aforementioned terminal devices are collectively referred to as terminal devices. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • FIG. 1 is only for the convenience of understanding, and schematically shows the terminal device 120 and the network device 110, but this should not constitute any limitation to the present application. More or less terminal devices may be included, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first device in this embodiment of the present application may be the terminal device 120, and the second device may be the network device 110; or the first device may be the terminal device 120, and the second device may be other terminal devices.
  • the embodiment of the beam in the NR protocol can be a spatial domain filter parameter, or a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the beam used to transmit the signal can be called the transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), which can be called the spatial domain transmission filter parameter or the spatial transmission parameter; the beam used to receive the signal can be It is called reception beam (reception beam, Rx beam), which can be called spatial reception filter parameter (spatial domain receive filter parameter) or spatial reception parameter (spatial RX parameter).
  • the beam may refer to the direction in which the signal energy is concentrated in space after the signal is transmitted through the antenna, and the receiving beam may refer to the direction in which the energy of the wireless signal received from the antenna is concentrated in space.
  • the beams may be wide beams, or narrow beams, or other types of beams.
  • the beamforming technique may be beamforming or other techniques.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology.
  • a specific beam corresponds to a specific spatial filtering parameter or beamforming parameter (such as a beamforming vector/parameter), hereinafter, any two of the beam, spatial filtering parameter and beamforming parameter can be considered as are one-to-one correspondence.
  • different reference signals generally correspond to different beams, that is, the transmitter uses different beams to transmit different reference signals on different resources. Therefore, the reference signal resource index can be used to identify the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource. Different transmit beams are determined by different spatial filtering parameters.
  • the transmitter can transmit reference signals on different reference signal resources, and different reference signals use different spatial filtering parameters to perform beamforming, and the receiver can perform beamforming on different reference signal resources on different reference signal resources. Take measurements to determine the quality of the beam.
  • Reference signals include but are not limited to sounding reference signal (SRS), CSI-RS, cell specific reference signal (CS-RS), UE specific reference signal (user equipment specific reference signal, US-RS) ), and synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block).
  • the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB).
  • a reference signal can have one or more ports. Different ports may occupy different time-frequency resources and/or different code domain resources.
  • the beamforming technology is analog beamforming, that is, beamforming the reference signal through a term shifter. In the entire communication bandwidth, a term shifter can only take one value at a time, so the analog beamforming technology needs to switch different beams through multiple different times.
  • the 3GPP NR Release 15/16 standardization introduced a beam training process in order to find a suitable beam direction among the many possible beams.
  • the process is as follows: the network device sends multiple reference signals on multiple time units (for example, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or time slots), and different reference signals Beamforming by different beams.
  • the terminal device measures different reference signals, determines the quality of the beams corresponding to the different reference signals, and reports the resource index of the reference signal with better beam quality.
  • the resource index of the reference signal with better beam quality is used to assist the network device in determining which beams to use Subsequent communications will have better signal quality.
  • these beams with better signal quality are called effective beams.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal receiving power (RSRP), and reports several reference signal resource indices with larger RSRPs.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the network area covered by each beam is small, that is, narrow beams are generally used.
  • network equipment and/or terminal equipment generally need to scan many beam directions, so beam training requires many time units, and beam training takes a long time, so fast beam training cannot be completed. For example, if there are 128 beams, 128 time units need to be occupied.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a fast beam training method, which can reduce the time delay of beam training and reduce the reference signal overhead caused by beam training.
  • the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 includes, but is not limited to:
  • the second device groups the L beams to obtain M groups of beams after the grouping, where L and M are positive integers.
  • the second device may perform uniform grouping or non-uniform grouping on the L beams to obtain each group of divided beams, and divide one grouping manner corresponding to multiple beams at a time.
  • each of the L beams corresponds to a spatial filtering parameter, such as a beamforming vector, which is used to determine an implementation manner of the second device sending a signal on the beam. Therefore, the spatial filtering parameters and beams can be regarded as one-to-one correspondence in the following.
  • S201 is an optional step, and S201 may not exist, that is, it is not necessary to group multiple beams each time, that is, the beams are divided in a default manner.
  • the number of beams included in each group of beams after grouping is greater than 2.
  • the second device configures M reference signal resources to the first device.
  • the configuration of the M reference signal resources by the second device to the first device is specifically to configure time-frequency resource positions of the M reference signal resources, M reference signal resource indices, and each reference signal resource in the M reference signal resources.
  • reference signal resource index may also be referred to as an index of a reference signal.
  • the second device is a network device
  • the first device is a terminal device.
  • each of the M reference signal resources has two ports, as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the M reference signal resources correspond to the M two-port reference signals.
  • a reference signal resource and a corresponding reference signal may be identified by a reference signal resource index.
  • Each of the M reference signals is associated with a group of beams in S201, in other words, a reference signal, a reference signal resource, a reference signal resource index, and a group of beams have a value between any of the four. a corresponding relationship.
  • the reference signal resource index may also be referred to as an index of a reference signal.
  • the second device determines spatial filtering parameters, such as beamforming parameters, of each reference signal when transmitting the reference signal according to each beam group corresponding to each reference signal.
  • the first device is enabled to obtain measurement results of different beams by measuring different reference signals.
  • the number of beams corresponding to each reference signal is greater than 2. That is, the second device can scan multiple beams by using one reference signal resource.
  • the embodiments of the present application can reduce the time required for beam scanning and reference signal overhead.
  • the second device may configure periodic, semi-static or aperiodic reference signal resources for the multiple times of beam grouping in S201.
  • the second device may configure M reference signal resources to the first device in a broadcast, multicast or unicast manner.
  • S203 The second device sends first configuration information for beam training to the first device, where the first configuration information configures L codewords.
  • the L codewords and the M reference signals have an associated relationship.
  • Each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword of the L codewords.
  • the M reference signals there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords among the L codewords.
  • one reference signal is associated with two codes among the L codewords
  • the other reference signal is associated with one codeword among the L codewords.
  • each reference signal is associated with two codewords or more than two codewords among the L codewords.
  • the mth reference signal among the M reference signals is associated with R m codewords among the L codewords, where Rm is a positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the L codewords configured by the second device through the first configuration information correspond to the L beams in S201, or the L codewords correspond to the L spatial filtering parameters one-to-one. Therefore, the m-th reference signal is also associated with R m spatial filtering parameters (beams) among the L spatial filtering parameters, and a codeword associated with the m-th reference signal is associated with a set of beams associated with the m-th reference signal. associated with one beam.
  • the first device receives the first configuration information of the configuration codeword, and may indicate the effective beam by reporting the first indication information indicating the codeword.
  • the configuration method of the L codewords and the association relationship between the L codewords and the M reference signals can be divided into the following three cases.
  • the codeword associated with each reference signal in the M reference signals is explicitly indicated in the first configuration information. That is, the first configuration information includes M first fields, and the M first fields are respectively used to carry codewords associated with the M reference signals.
  • the method for associating the codeword with the mth reference signal explicitly indicated in the first configuration information reference may be made to the predefined first rule in case 2 and/or the predefined second rule in case 3.
  • the first configuration information configures the number R m of codewords associated with the m th reference signal among the M reference signals, and R m is used to determine the R m codes associated with the m th reference signal according to a predefined first rule word, R m is a positive integer less than or equal to L, m is a positive integer less than or equal to M,
  • the codewords associated with each reference signal may be the same or different.
  • the codewords associated with the first reference signal and the second reference signal are ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 0), exp(j ⁇ /2), exp(j ⁇ ), exp(j ⁇ 3 ⁇ /2 ) ⁇
  • the codeword associated with the third reference signal is ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 0), exp(j ⁇ 2 ⁇ /5), exp(j ⁇ 4 ⁇ /5), exp(j ⁇ 6 ⁇ /5), exp( j ⁇ 8 ⁇ /5) ⁇ .
  • the first configuration information configures the number R m of codewords associated with the m th reference signal among the M reference signals, R m and the number M of reference signals are used to determine the m th reference signal association according to a predefined second rule R m codewords of , R m is a positive integer less than or equal to L, m is a positive integer less than or equal to M,
  • the predefined second rule makes any two of the L codewords different.
  • the index of the i-th codeword associated with the m-th reference signal among the M reference signals is: or
  • the codeword associated with the first reference signal is ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 2 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 11 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 9 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 25 ⁇ /14) ⁇
  • codeword associated with the second reference signal ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 4 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 11 ⁇ / 7), exp(j ⁇ 29 ⁇ /14) ⁇
  • the codeword associated with the third reference signal is ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 6 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 44 ⁇ /35), exp(j ⁇ 58 ⁇ /35) , exp(j ⁇ 72 ⁇ /35), exp(j ⁇ 86 ⁇ /3
  • each codeword can also be in the form of column vector B ⁇ [1; t i ] or the form of row vector B ⁇ [1, t i ], where B is a constant, for example.
  • some beam groups may be allowed to configure codewords according to case 1 and/or case 2, and the remaining beam groups may be allowed to configure codewords according to case 3.
  • the second device sends first configuration information to the first device, and the first configuration information configures the first device to report the first indication information with different options.
  • the first configuration information may indicate that the number of reference signals reported by the first device is W, and the number of codewords associated with the W reference signals is V.
  • the first indication information reported by the first device in S205 indicates the indices of the W reference signals, and the index of the codeword or codeword associated with each of the W reference signals, wherein, For the wth reference signal among the W reference signals, the associated vw codewords or codeword indices are reported, where the W reference signals are the reference signals among the M reference signals, vw is a positive integer, and For the vth codeword among the V codewords, its index is the index of the codeword in the codeword associated with its corresponding reference signal.
  • the second device can determine a group of beams in the corresponding relationship between the reference signal resource index and the beam group in S202, and further, according to the above reference signal codeword and beam Correspondingly, the second device determines a beam in the group of beams by using a codeword reported by the first device and associated with the reported reference signal, and the determined beam is an effective beam reported by the first device.
  • the first configuration information configures the codeword according to the example in the above-mentioned second case, and the first device reports the index of the second reference signal and the index corresponding to the codeword exp(j ⁇ /2), then the reported reference signal
  • the resource index is the index corresponding to the second reference signal
  • the reported codeword index is exp(j ⁇ /2) in ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 0), exp(j ⁇ /2), exp(j ⁇ ) , the index in exp(j ⁇ 3 ⁇ /2) ⁇ , that is, 1 (each codeword index is 0-3) or 2 (each codeword index is 1-4).
  • the first configuration information can configure the number of codewords reported by the first device as V or the number of codeword indices is V.
  • the first indication information reported by the first device in S205 includes V codewords or V codeword indices, and the V codewords indicated by the first indication information are the L codes configured by the first configuration information V codewords in a word.
  • the vth codeword in the V codewords its index is the index of the codeword in the L codewords.
  • the index of the i-th codeword associated with the m-th reference signal among the M reference signals is: or According to the correspondence between the codeword and the beam, the second device can directly determine a beam through a codeword reported by the first device, and the determined beam is an effective beam reported by the first device.
  • the first configuration information configures the codeword according to the example in the third case above, and the first device reports the index corresponding to the codeword exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14) in the multiple codewords associated with the second reference signal, Then the reported codeword index is exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14) in ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 2 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 4 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 11 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 6 ⁇ /7) /7), exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 44 ⁇ /35), exp(j ⁇ 9 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 11 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 58 ⁇ /35), exp (j ⁇ 25 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 29 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 72 ⁇ /35), exp(j ⁇ 86 ⁇ /35) ⁇ , that is, 4 (each codeword index is 0-12 ) or 5 (each codeword index is 1-13).
  • the second device can determine that the effective beam reported by the first device is the second beam in the
  • the first configuration information in option 1 and option 2 may further configure the first device to report amplitude information and/or energy information of the V codewords.
  • the energy information includes RSRP information.
  • the first configuration information sent by the second device in S203 may indicate a manner in which the first device reports the first indication information in S205, such as periodic reporting, semi-static reporting or aperiodic reporting.
  • the first configuration information sent by the second device in S203 may also not indicate the manner in which the first device reports the measurement result, and the first device adopts the default reporting manner.
  • S202 and S203 may be sent in the same message or may be sent in different messages, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the second device may perform S203 once for one beam division, or may perform S203 once for multiple divisions.
  • the second device sends M reference signals on the resources configured by the first device in S202.
  • the second device sends two-port reference signals to the resources configured by the first device in S202 through each group of beams corresponding to the configured resources. If the second device divides the beams multiple times in S201, then S204 is executed multiple times.
  • the m th reference signal when the second device sends the m th reference signal among the M reference signals, the m th reference signal has 2 ports.
  • the device determines the second port beamforming parameters of the reference signal 1 according to R & lt m beams of reference signals corresponding to m; R R m of the m-th beam and the reference signals corresponding to the m-th signal according to the associated reference
  • the m codewords determine the beamforming parameters for port 2.
  • the beam corresponding to the mth reference signal is determined by the second device, refer to S201.
  • At least one codeword associated with the m-th reference signal is determined by the first configuration information, refer to S202.
  • the beamforming parameters of port 1 are determined according to ⁇ b i
  • the reference signal sent by port 1 is determined according to ⁇ b i ⁇ s 1 .
  • the beamforming parameters of port 2 are determined according to ⁇ t i b i , where t i is the i-th codeword associated with the m-th reference signal, and the specific form can refer to the process of configuring the codeword in the first configuration information in S203 , the reference signal sent by port 2 is determined according to ⁇ t i b i ⁇ s 2 .
  • s 1 and s 2 are the signals on port 1 and port 2 agreed upon by the second device and the first device, for example, the signals in NR can be determined according to the positions of resource elements (resource elements, RE) corresponding to the two ports of the reference signal. s 1 and s 2 .
  • the reference signal sending method enables the second device to scan multiple directions when sending a reference signal, and at the same time, the second port of the reference signal is multiplied with different codewords in different beam directions, enabling the first device to determine the received reference signal Which transmit beam from the second device.
  • the code word t i is set as a point on the complex plane unit circle, so that the transmitted reference signal has no amplitude loss, and can achieve a certain anti-noise effect.
  • the first device measures the mth reference signal according to the following assumption:
  • Transmitting a first signal port of the two ports is determined according to s 1; and / or,
  • the first device determines that the second device sends s 1 on the first port through each beam direction of the group of beams, and sends s 1 on the second port through each direction of the group of beams. Send t i ⁇ s 2 respectively .
  • the first device performs normalization processing on the received reference signal in a manner agreed upon by the second device and the first device. For example, for the m-th reference signal in the example of S204, the first device determines that the second device sends s 1 on the first port through each beam direction of the group of beams, and sends s 1 through each direction of the group of beams on the first port. t i ⁇ s 2 is sent on the two ports respectively. Then, in S205, the first device divides the received first port signal and the second port signal by s 1 and s 2 respectively, and then performs post-sequence processing.
  • the first device reports the first indication information according to the first configuration indication information. If the second device does not instruct the first device to report the first indication information in the first configuration information in S203, the first device reports the first indication information to the second device in a default manner.
  • the first device reports the first indication information according to different reporting options indicated by the first configuration information in S203.
  • the first indication information reported by the first device indicates indices of W reference signals, and an index of a codeword or codeword associated with each of the W reference signals, wherein the W The wth reference signal among the reference signals is associated with vw codewords.
  • the first device first selects W reference signals from the M reference signals as the reference signals to be reported, and a method for selecting the W reference signals may be to select W among the M reference signals with larger energy or amplitude. larger reference signal.
  • the first device determines v w codewords of each reference signal according to the measurement results on the two ports of the W reference signals.
  • a method for determining a codeword is to measure the measured phase difference of two ports on the reference signal for a reference signal that needs to be reported, and then select the code with the smallest phase difference from at least one codeword associated with the reference signal. Character.
  • the index corresponding to the codeword is the index of the codeword in the R m codewords corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the first device receives 3 reference signals, and the RSRP energy of the second reference signal is the largest, the phase difference between the two ports of the second reference signal is 0.4 ⁇ , and the codeword associated with the second reference signal is ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 0), exp(j ⁇ /2), exp(j ⁇ ), exp(j ⁇ 3 ⁇ /2) ⁇ , obviously the codewords exp(j ⁇ /2) and exp(j ⁇ 0.4 ⁇ ) are the most close, so the first device reports the index of the second reference signal and the index of the codeword exp(j ⁇ /2) or the codeword exp(j ⁇ /2) (the code is reported when the index of each codeword is 0-3).
  • the word index is 1, and when each codeword index is 1-4, the reported codeword index is 2).
  • the first indication information reported by the first device includes reporting V codewords or codeword indices. Then, the first device first selects W reference signals from the M reference signals as the reference signals to be reported. For the selection method, refer to the above option 1. Then V codewords are determined according to the measurement results on the two ports of the W reference signals.
  • a method for determining a codeword is to measure the measured phase difference between two ports on the reference signal for a reference signal that needs to be reported, and then select the code with the smallest difference from the phase difference in at least one codeword associated with the reference signal. Character.
  • the first device receives three reference signals, and the RSRP energy of the second reference signal is the largest, the phase difference between the two ports of the second reference signal is ⁇ , and the code word associated with the second reference signal is ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 4 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14), exp(j ⁇ 11 ⁇ /7), exp(j ⁇ 29 ⁇ /14) ⁇ , obviously the codewords exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14) and exp(j ⁇ ) is the closest, according to the example in option 2 in S203, the index of the codeword exp(j ⁇ 15 ⁇ /14) in all L codewords is 4 (each codeword index is 0-12) or 5 (each codeword index is 1-13). Therefore, the first device reports the codeword exp(j*15 ⁇ /14) or its index.
  • the first device sends third indication information to the second device, where the third indication information indicates at least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information corresponding to the V codewords, and the first amplitude information corresponding to the V codewords or the first energy information.
  • the amplitude information includes amplitude information corresponding to each of the V codewords.
  • the first energy information corresponding to the V codewords includes energy information corresponding to each of the V codewords. At least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information is a quantized result, and the specific quantization manner and precision may be predefined or configured by the second device.
  • the second device estimates each beam between the second device and the first device according to the first indication information, and determines one or more beams for transmitting signals.
  • the second device may determine the effective transmission beam between the second device and the first device according to the correspondence between the L codewords and the L beams and the codeword reported by the first device.
  • the second device may also estimate the determined gain of each effective beam according to the amplitude information and/or energy information reported by the first device, Effective beams are further selected based on amplitude information and/or energy information.
  • the second device may group multiple beams for multiple times, and by grouping multiple times as much as possible, beams covering multiple effective paths between the second device and the first device appear in different groups, A situation in which more than one effective path is covered by beams in the same group of beams is avoided, so that the first device cannot estimate the effective beams through the reference signal measurement result.
  • the second device configures a two-port reference signal for each group of beams.
  • the first device measures multiple beams in the group of beams by using a two-port reference signal, so that the beam training speed can be improved and the reference signal overhead can be reduced.
  • the second device configures that each reference signal is associated with multiple codewords, and each codeword in the multiple codewords is associated with a beam.
  • the signal of the second port is directed to different beam directions. Multiplied by its corresponding codeword, that is, the phase difference between the two ports in different beam directions is different.
  • the number of effective paths between the second device and the first device is very small.
  • the number of effective beams in a group of beams does not exceed The probability of 1 is very large, so when the energy of the reference signal received by the first device is relatively large, most of the energy is very likely to come from one beam direction.
  • the effective beam directions are different, and the two-port phase difference of the reference signal received by the first device is different, so that the effective beam direction can be inferred when the reference signal resources are shared by multiple beam directions.
  • the second device supports 64 beams.
  • one beam corresponds to one reference signal resource, and there are 64 reference signal resources in total.
  • the reference signal is measured, and the measurement result (such as RSRP) and the reference signal resource index are reported.
  • the second device can determine the beam according to the reference signal resource index and the measurement result.
  • the second device supports the 64 beams.
  • the second device needs to configure 16 two-port reference signals and codewords corresponding to 16 groups of beams, one group of beams corresponds to one two-port reference
  • the port reference signal is measured, and the reported measurement result includes the index of the reference signal and the code word, or only the code word is reported.
  • the network device can determine at least one set of beams according to the index of the reference signal, and the at least one set of beams according to the code word Determine the beam, or directly determine the beam according to the codeword, so that the resource overhead can be saved.
  • the process of determining the beam in the method 200 is described in detail below.
  • the following description takes the example of uniformly dividing the beam, the reference signal is CSI-RS, the first device is a terminal device, and the second device is a network device, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • Step 1 Divide the beam.
  • the network device supports a total of S optional beams.
  • the network device can divide the S optional beams H times, and each division divides the S beams into M groups.
  • the beams in each group include R beams (there is a group of divided beam directions that can be less than R), and one beam corresponds to one beam. direction.
  • the network device can simultaneously transmit different reference signals in R beam directions.
  • Step 2. Configure resources.
  • the network device configures a 2-port non-zero power CSI-RS (non zero power CSI-RS, NZP-CSI-RS) resource for each group of beams in each division, in other words, a group of beams in one beam division Corresponds to a 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource.
  • the network device can configure M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for one division, and configure H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for H divisions.
  • the H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources configured by the network device can be periodic or semi-static or aperiodic, and each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS is bound to a group of beams in one division Certainly.
  • the network device For periodic resources, the network device needs to configure at least M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in a cycle, and the M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources need to be in different symbols. In this way, the network device When sending M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS, it can be staggered in time.
  • the offset (offset) of the end time of the Mth 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource relative to the period is The offset of the end time of the first 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource relative to the period (offset) is need to guarantee T proc is the processing time for the reference signal of one cycle after the terminal device receives the reference signal of one cycle, and T proc may be determined by the terminal device and the network device through signaling exchange.
  • the periodic resource configured by the network device needs to ensure that the terminal device has enough time to process the reference signal of one cycle between two cycles.
  • RS 4 (h, 1) denotes a first reference signal resources in the first division of one cycle time h T period
  • RS (h, 2 ) represents the time h in the first division of one cycle T period
  • There are two reference signal resources RS(h, M) represents the Mth reference signal resource in a period T period in the hth division.
  • RS(h+1,1) represents the first reference signal resource in a period T period in the h+1th division, and RS(h+1,M) represents a period T period in the h+1th division
  • the Mth reference signal resource of The h-th division and the h+1-th division belong to two adjacent divisions in the H division.
  • the network device For semi-static resources, the network device needs to configure at least M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in one cycle, and the M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources need to be in different symbols. In this way, the network device When the reference signals are sent through M groups of beams on the M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources, they can be staggered in time. And the semi-static resource configured by the network device needs to be able to maintain at least H periods in an active state. and guarantee The description of these parameters refers to periodically configured resources.
  • the network device needs to configure H NZP-CSI-RS resource sets, each NZP-CSI-RS resource set includes M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources, and each NZP-CSI-RS resource set includes M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources.
  • the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in the set need to be in different symbols, so that the network device can stagger in time when sending reference signals through M groups of beams on the M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources .
  • the network device sends a CSI-reporting command to the terminal device, and the CSI-reporting command is used to configure the terminal device to measure the reference signal and report the measurement result.
  • the CSI-reporting command includes information used to instruct the terminal device on which resources configured in step 2 to measure the reference signal.
  • the value of the nrofBeamEachRS field in the CSI-reporting command is R, and the field nrofBeamEachRS is an embodiment of the present application for the training of this beam.
  • the new field of the scheme, R is the number of beam directions of each group in step 1.
  • the network device can indicate the R codewords corresponding to each reference signal in two ways, namely:
  • Mode 1 The network device indirectly configures the R codewords corresponding to each reference signal by configuring the number R of beam directions in each group to be ⁇ exp(j ⁇ 0), exp(j ⁇ 2 ⁇ /R), exp(j ⁇ 4 ⁇ ) /R), ..., exp(j ⁇ 2(R-1) ⁇ /R) ⁇ , corresponding to the second case of the above method 200 .
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether the network device adopts the first mode or the second mode through relevant signaling, or it may not indicate, and the network device and the terminal device default to one of them according to certain predefined rules. Way.
  • the nrofReportedRS field in the reference signal reporting instruction is set to W, which indicates that the terminal device needs to report the measurement results of W reference signals among the M reference signals.
  • W may be the number of effective paths (also referred to as effective beams) between the network device and the terminal device estimated by the network device.
  • the network device can configure the specific content reported by the terminal device for each reference signal as:
  • the network device can configure the terminal device to report: the reference signal resource index, and the reference signal corresponding to the index
  • the two-port phase difference quantization results of can be defaulted to convert the phase difference into a phase difference between [0, 2 ⁇ ), and then perform uniform quantization of X bits.
  • the network device can configure the terminal device to report: the reference signal resource index, and a codeword associated with the reference signal is in the The reference signal correlates indices in all codewords.
  • the network device configures the terminal device to report: a codeword under the reference signal or an index of the codeword in all codewords.
  • CSI-reporting may further instruct the terminal to report the amplitude information and/or RSRP information of the reported reference signal.
  • the amplitude information and/or RSRP information of the reference signal may be the respective amplitude information and/or the RSRP quantization result on the amplitudes of the two ports of the received reference signal, or may be the quantization result after the amplitude weighted average of the two ports.
  • the precision of quantization is a predefined X bits within a predefined range.
  • CSI-reporting can also indicate a way for the terminal equipment to report the measurement result of the reference signal. .
  • the resources configured in step 2 are also periodic, and the period at which the terminal equipment reports the reference signal is the same as the resource in step 2.
  • the period is the same as T period , so that it can be guaranteed that the terminal equipment can report the measurement result once by measuring the reference signal of one period. It reported the relationship between R and the time period in the resource allocation period T needs to satisfy the bias or satisfy 5, there is shown an alternative time of reporting the time T R, Indicates that the terminal device needs to report the measurement result after receiving and processing the last reference signal under one division and before the end of one cycle. Indicates that the terminal device needs to report the measurement result after the first reference signal in the next cycle is received and processed. This setting can ensure that one measurement result reported by the terminal device is exactly the result of some reference signals in the M reference signals under one beam division.
  • the resources configured in step 2 may be periodic or semi-static.
  • the period for the terminal equipment to report the reference signal and the period of the periodic resource or the period of the semi-statically configured resource in step 2 are both T period . In this way, it can be ensured that the terminal device can report the measurement result once by measuring the reference signal of one cycle.
  • the relationship between the reported time TR and the period of resource configuration needs to be satisfied or satisfy The periodic report is consistent with the above. This setting can ensure that one measurement result reported by the terminal device is exactly the result of some reference signals in the M reference signals under one beam division.
  • the resources configured in step 2 may be periodic or semi-static or aperiodic.
  • the network device needs to send the reference signal reporting command H times, and the terminal device reports the measurement result once every time the reference signal reporting command is sent.
  • Step 4 The network device sends 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on the resource configured in step 2.
  • step 4 according to the corresponding relationship between each group of beams and 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in each division determined in step 2, for a group of beams, the network device uses each beam in the group to The group beam corresponds to the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource sent on the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS.
  • the spatial filtering parameter in the i-th beam direction can be, for example, a vector in the DFT basis.
  • the spatial filtering parameter of the network device on port 1 of the mth reference signal may be ⁇ b i .
  • Spatial filtering parameter port 2 is ⁇ t i b i. If the network device configures the codeword for the terminal device in step 3, t i needs to be consistent with the codeword configured for each reference signal.
  • t i can be implemented according to the network device, but in principle , any two elements in ⁇ t i ⁇ corresponding to the same reference signal are different, and a network
  • the method for the device to determine ⁇ t i ⁇ is that the network device determines the code word according to the first method or the second method in step 3, and then keeps ⁇ t i ⁇ and the code word consistent.
  • the network device sends it through the four beam directions bound to the reference signal.
  • the network device sends a signal as (b 1 +b 2 +b 3 +b 4 )s 1 , on the second port NZP-CSI -
  • the signal sent on the RS resource is (t 1 b 1 +t 2 b 2 +t 3 b 3 +t 4 b 4 ) ⁇ s 2 .
  • s 1 is the reference signal value on the first port agreed upon by the network device and the terminal equipment
  • s 2 is the reference signal value on the second port agreed upon by the network equipment and the terminal equipment.
  • the manner of determining s 1 and s 2 may follow the manner of determining the NZP-CSI-RS baseband signal according to the RE time-frequency position of the reference signal in the current NR. From the perspective of the terminal device, the reference signal sending method is equivalent to that, the network device sends the signal s 1 on the first port through 4 directions, and sends the signal t 1 s on the second port through the 4 directions respectively. 2 , t 2 s 2 , t 3 s 2 , t 4 s 2 .
  • the network device may sequentially transmit the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on the corresponding 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources through the M groups of beams divided once. In this way, the network device can transmit the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on the corresponding 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources through the M groups of beams that are divided once, and then the network device can pass the M groups of beams that are divided again. , send 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on their corresponding 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources, and so on, the network device can pass H*M divided beams, in H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS Send H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on the RS resource.
  • Step 5 The terminal device measures the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS in step 4, and reports the measurement result to the network device.
  • the terminal device receives the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS sent by the network device in step 4, and measures the received reference signal.
  • the terminal device receives the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS sent by the network device, and measures the phase or amplitude and phase of the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS.
  • the terminal device is in the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource RS (h, m)
  • the baseband signal signals of the normalized NZP-CSI-RS received on the two ports are respectively and Its phase between [0, 2 ⁇ ) is and The value of h is 1, 2, ..., H, and the value of m is 1, 2, ..., M. For one division, the value of h is fixed. Normalization refers to dividing the received baseband reference signal by the baseband transmitted reference signal at the corresponding time-frequency position agreed with the network device, that is, normalization is performed according to s 1 and s 2 respectively.
  • the terminal device For the M reference signals under one division, the terminal device first selects W reference signals from the M reference signals for reporting, where W is the value of the field nrofReportedRS when the network device triggers the CSI-reporting command in step 3. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device selects The larger W reference signals, in another possible implementation, the terminal device selects The larger W reference signals, where ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are the weight coefficients of the two ports, may be preset values, or may be configured by the network device.
  • the terminal device reports the measurement result according to the configuration options of the network device in step 3:
  • the terminal equipment reports: the reference signal resource index, and the quantization result of the two-port reference phase difference corresponding to the index.
  • the method of phase difference quantization can be defaulted to convert the phase difference into a phase difference between [0, 2 ⁇ ), that is Then quantify it.
  • the terminal equipment reports: the reference signal resource index, and the index of a codeword associated with the reference signal among all codewords associated with it.
  • a possible implementation manner of determining the codeword index to be reported is: first determine the codeword ⁇ t r ⁇ associated with the reference signal according to the configuration information related to the CSI-reporting instruction of the network device in step 3, and according to formula (1) Determine the codeword index rh,m to be reported.
  • the physical meaning of formula (1) is that there is a phase difference between the 2 ports of the NZP-CSI-RS sent by the network device in each beam direction.
  • the effective beam direction between the network device and the terminal device the beam direction that can communicate between the two
  • the phase difference between the two ports of the reference signal measured by the terminal device is also different, so that the smallest code word on the right side of the equation (1) corresponds to the effective beam direction between the network device and the terminal device.
  • any modification of formula (1) can be performed, but the physical meaning of the formula after the modification is similar to that of formula (1). In this way, one codeword corresponds to one beam, and the network device can determine the corresponding beam according to the phase index reported by the terminal device.
  • the 4 codewords associated with an NZP-CSI-RS reported by the terminal equipment are ⁇ exp(j*0), exp(j* ⁇ /2), exp(j* ⁇ ), exp(j* 3 ⁇ /2) ⁇ .
  • the network device sends the NZP-CSI-RS through the 4 beam directions bound to the reference signal, and the terminal device receives the NZP-CSI-RS sent in the 4 beam directions at the two-port NZP-CSI-RS resource location.
  • the superimposed signal after channel attenuation.
  • the end device will receive on the first port is hs 1 or close to hs 1 , received on the second port for or close to This is because other beams except the third beam in the first group have no effective paths, and the terminal equipment receives NZP-CSI-RS sent by other beams as 0 or close to 0.
  • the terminal device can obtain the codeword index 2 (index in 0-3) according to the received signal and formula (1).
  • the terminal equipment reports: the index of a codeword associated with the reference signal among all codewords.
  • the terminal device first determines R codewords ⁇ t r ⁇ associated with the reference signal according to the configuration information related to the CSI-reporting instruction of the network device in step 3, and then Determine the index r h,m of the codeword in the R m codewords associated with the reference signal according to formula (1), assuming that the reported reference signal is the mth reference signal among the M reference signals, and then add it to (m-1)R is reported as the codeword index.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the configuration information related to the CSI-reporting instruction of the network device in step 3, the number of reference signals associated with the first and second reference signals.
  • the network device in step 3 is configured with the amplitude information or energy information that the terminal device needs to report the measured value of the reference signal, then in step 5, for a reference signal that needs to be reported, the terminal device also needs to report. and separate amplitude quantization values and or and Separate energy quantization values.
  • Step 6 the network device determines the beam according to the measurement result reported by the terminal device.
  • the network device can determine the beam in different ways.
  • step 5 if the terminal device reports option 1, the network device determines the effective beam in two cases in step 6:
  • the network device can determine a group of beams, and the network device will Compare the quantized phase difference value of the two ports reported by the equipment with the phase difference of the two-port reference signal sent on each beam in the group of beams in step 4, and compare the quantized phase difference value reported by the terminal equipment and the network equipment on each side of the group. Which direction in the phase difference of the two ports when the reference signal is sent upwards is the closest, so that it can be estimated which direction in the corresponding group of directions is the effective sending direction.
  • the network device can estimate an effective beam direction, and the multiple effective beam directions estimated according to the reference signals under different divisions may overlap.
  • the beam is determined through the following three steps.
  • the network equipment finds the division with the highest degree of isolation among multiple divisions.
  • the highest degree of isolation means that if there are multiple effective paths between the terminal equipment and the network equipment, multiple beams covering multiple effective paths belong to the network equipment for one division different groups below.
  • the network device For the reporting result under the hth division reported by the terminal device, the network device counts the number of reference signals G h whose weighted average amplitude value or energy value of the two ports of the reference signal in this division is greater than a preset threshold, which is equivalent to the The number of groups containing active beams under the subdivision. Since the number of effective beams in the entire channel environment is the same, when the beams are grouped, the best measurement results are obtained by dividing all the effective beams into different groups. Therefore , the one or more divisions with the largest G h value are defined as the division with the highest isolation degree.
  • the division with the highest degree of isolation in a) includes multiple divisions. Under each division, a group of beams can be determined for each NZP-CSI-RS, and the network device will compare the phase difference of the two-port reference signal sent on each beam in the group of beams in step 4, and compare the terminal equipment.
  • the quantized value of the reported phase difference is the closest to the phase difference of the two-port phase difference between the two ports when the network device sends the reference signal in each direction, so that the corresponding direction in the group of directions can be estimated as the effective sending direction.
  • the error between the phase difference reported by the terminal equipment and the actual phase difference in the effective beam direction of the network equipment can also be obtained, and the error sum under each division can be accumulated and counted, so that a minimum error sum can be found among the multiple divisions with the highest isolation degree.
  • the division of is the optimal division, and the multiple estimated effective beam directions corresponding to this division can be used as the effective beam directions determined by the network device. If the division with the highest isolation degree in a) has one division, the effective beam direction under this division is directly estimated.
  • the network equipment estimates the gain of the effective beam direction. If the terminal equipment also reports the amplitude quantization value or energy quantization value of each reference signal, the gain of each effective beam direction output in b) can be estimated, so as to further select among these effective beam directions.
  • step 5 if the terminal device reports option 2, the network device determines the effective beam in two cases in step 6:
  • Case 1 If the measurement result reported by the network device does not contain the amplitude information or energy information of the reference signal, according to the reference signal resource index reported by the terminal device, the network device can determine its associated codeword and a set of beams, and according to the report by the terminal device and the corresponding relationship between the codeword and the beam in step 4, the network device can determine one beam in the group of beams. Therefore, each time the terminal device reports a measurement result of a reference signal, the network device can estimate an effective beam direction, wherein the multiple effective beam directions estimated according to the reference signals under different divisions may overlap.
  • the network device searches for the division with the highest isolation degree among the multiple divisions. For details, refer to the above b) to find the division with the highest isolation degree.
  • the effective beam direction is then estimated with reference to Case 1 under the division with the highest degree of isolation. If the terminal device also reports the amplitude quantization value of each reference signal, the gain of each effective beam direction output in b) can be estimated, so as to further select among these effective beam directions.
  • step 5 if the terminal device reports option 3, the network device determines the effective beam in two cases in step 6:
  • Case 1 If the measurement result reported by the network device does not contain the amplitude information or energy information of the reference signal, the network device can determine a beam according to the codeword index reported by the terminal device and the correspondence between the codeword and the beam in step 4. Therefore, every time the terminal device reports a codeword index, the network device can estimate an effective beam direction, and the multiple effective beam directions estimated according to the reference signals under different divisions may overlap.
  • Scenario 2 If the measurement result reported by the terminal device includes the amplitude information or energy information of the reference signal, the network device searches for the division with the highest isolation degree among multiple divisions. For details, see b) above to find the division with the highest isolation degree. The effective beam direction is then estimated with reference to Case 1 under the division with the highest degree of isolation. If the terminal device also reports the amplitude quantization value and/or energy quantization value of each reference signal, the gain of each effective beam direction output in b) can be estimated, so as to further select among these effective beam directions.
  • the second device configures resources to the first device and sends the first configuration information
  • the first device measures the reference signal sent by the second device according to the configured resources and the first configuration information, and compares the measurement results. report to the second device, and the second device determines the effective beam according to the measurement result.
  • the method for beam training in this embodiment of the present application is described below with reference to the method 300 in FIG. 6 .
  • the second device configures resources to the first device and sends second configuration information.
  • the first device A device can directly determine the effective beam direction and/or the channel gain of the effective beam direction, and then report it.
  • the second device directly instructs the first device all the beam training information, the first device estimates the gain of each beam direction by itself, and finally directly reports its estimated effective beam direction (and corresponding gain) without having to measure and report each reference signal one by one for each division.
  • Method 300 includes:
  • S301 is the same as S201.
  • S302 is the same as S202.
  • the second device sends second configuration information to the first device, where the second configuration information configures L spatial filtering parameter indices and L codewords, and the mth reference signal in the M reference signals is associated with R in the L codewords There are m codewords, and the mth reference signal is also associated with R m spatial filtering parameter indices in the L spatial filtering parameter indices, where M is a positive integer greater than 1, and R m is a positive integer.
  • the L spatial filtering parameter indices are in one-to-one correspondence with the L codewords, and the L codewords are in one-to-one correspondence with the L beams.
  • the L spatial filtering parameter indices, the L codewords, and the L beams Any two of the three can be in one-to-one correspondence.
  • the L spatial filtering parameters may be L beamforming parameters, such as vectors in the L DFT bases.
  • the spatial filtering parameter index corresponds to the beamforming vector index, for example, the DFT vector index.
  • one spatial filtering parameter corresponds to one beam in S301.
  • the second configuration information explicitly indicates a spatial filtering parameter index associated with each of the M reference signals. That is, the second configuration information includes M second fields, and the M second fields respectively configure spatial filtering parameter indices associated with the M reference signals.
  • the second configuration information configures a random seed
  • the terminal device may use the random seed to determine the spatial filtering parameter index associated with each reference signal in the M reference signals.
  • the first device determines the spatial filtering parameter index associated with each of the M reference signals based on the following assumptions: 1) In S301, the second device groups the beams by using a predefined random grouping function and a random seed to group the beam indices Realized, in other words, when the second device divides the beam into groups, the random seed is input into the random grouping function to obtain the index of the grouped beam, and the second device divides the beam according to the index of the grouped beam; 2) the second device is in The random seed used in S301 is consistent with the random seed carried in the second configuration information sent to the first device; 3) the first device inputs the random seed into the same predefined random grouping function as in step 1) to obtain the index of the grouping beam, and the grouping The index of the beam is the index of the L spatial filtering parameters associated with the M reference signals.
  • S303 is an optional step, the second device may not send the second configuration information to the first device, and the first device may report according to the preset configuration and the measurement result of the reference signal obtained by measurement.
  • S302 and S303 may be sent in the same message or may be sent in different messages, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first device measures the mth reference signal according to the following assumption:
  • the transmission signal of the two ports of the first port is a ⁇ b i ⁇ s 1 determined; and / or,
  • the first device determines that the second device sends s 1 on the first port through each beam direction of the group of beams, and sends s 1 on the second port through each direction of the group of beams. Send t i ⁇ s 2 respectively .
  • the above S301-304 are repeatedly performed H times, that is, the second device divides all the beams H times, and sends H*M reference signals in total.
  • Each division of the M reference signals corresponds to L codewords, and each division of the M reference signals corresponds to L spatial filtering parameters.
  • the first device measures the M reference signals sent by the second device in S304, and determines V effective beams and their gains.
  • the first device synthesizes the results of the H-order beam divisions, and may determine a beam division with a higher beam isolation degree from the H-time beam division, and then more accurately divide the effective beam and the effective beam according to the division with a higher beam isolation degree.
  • the gain is estimated to report the spatial filtering parameter indices corresponding to the V effective beams.
  • the first device sends second indication information to the second device, where the second indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameter indices among the L spatial filtering parameter indices, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the V spatial filtering parameter indices may be indices of the V beams with larger gains in the estimation result of the first device in S305.
  • the method 300 further includes: the first device sends fourth indication information to the second device, where the fourth indication information indicates at least one of the second amplitude information or the second energy information corresponding to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • the second amplitude information includes amplitude information corresponding to each of the V spatial filtering parameters, that is, amplitude information corresponding to the V beams.
  • the second energy information includes capability information for each of the V spatial filtering parameters, that is, energy information corresponding to the V beams.
  • the second device determines the effective beam according to the V spatial filtering parameters.
  • one spatial filtering parameter index corresponds to one beam
  • the first device may determine V effective beams in total.
  • the second device may also report the second amplitude corresponding to the V spatial filtering parameter indices according to the V spatial filtering parameter indices. At least one of the information or the second energy information further selects the V effective beams.
  • the method S300 can also save the reporting overhead of the first device.
  • the first device needs to report the second indication information once for each beam division. Multiple beam divisions) comprehensively estimate the effective beams.
  • the second device indicates the beam grouping information, that is, the spatial filtering parameter index corresponding to each reference signal, to the first device, and the first device can directly estimate the effective beam by synthesizing the measurement results of multiple beam divisions locally. Therefore, for multiple beam groupings, the first device only needs to report the indication information once.
  • the following describes the process of determining the beam in the method 300 in detail.
  • the following description takes the example of uniformly dividing the beam, the reference signal is CSI-RS, the first device is a terminal device, and the second device is a network device, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • Step 1 divide the beam.
  • step 1 For the division of beams in step 1, refer to step 1 in the example of method 200 .
  • Step 2 configure resources.
  • the network device configures a 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource for each group of beams in each division, in other words, a group of beams in one beam division corresponds to a 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource.
  • the network device can configure M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for one division, and configure H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for H divisions.
  • the H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources configured by the network device may be periodic or semi-static or aperiodic.
  • Each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource is bound to a group of beams under one division.
  • the network device For periodic resources and semi-static resources, the network device needs to configure at least H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in a period, and these H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources need to be in the In different symbols, in this way, the network device can stagger in time when sending reference signals through H*M groups of beams on H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources.
  • RS 7 (h, 1) represents a first reference signal resource h DIVISION one period T period of
  • RS (h, M) represents the h-DIVISION one period T period of M reference signal resources
  • RS(h+1, M+1) represents the first reference signal resource in the h+1th division within a period T period
  • RS(H, M*H) represents a period T period
  • the Mth reference signal resource in the Hth division, RS(H+1,1) represents the first reference signal resource in the H+1th division
  • the H+1th division is the first reference signal resource of another cycle.
  • a division of the reference signal is the first reference signal resource of another cycle.
  • the period of the periodic resource configured by the network device is T period , the end time of the H*Mth 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource (RS(H, M*H) in FIG. 8 ) in this period is relatively
  • the period offset (offset) is The offset of the end time of the first 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource relative to the period (offset) is need to guarantee T proc is the processing time for the reference signal of one cycle after the terminal device receives the reference signal of one cycle, and T proc may be determined by the terminal device and the network device through signaling exchange.
  • the network device needs to dynamically configure H*M NZP-CSI-RS resource sets, and the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources in each NZP-CSI-RS resource set need to be in different symbols. In this way, when the network device transmits the reference signal through the M groups of beams on the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource, it can be staggered in time.
  • the network device sends a CSI-reporting command to the terminal device, where the CSI-reporting command includes information used to indicate which of the resources configured in step 2 to measure the reference signal, and the CSI-reporting command is used to instruct the terminal device to report the reference signal.
  • the value of the reportQuantity field BeamGroupingConfig in the CSI-reporting command is sequence(S, R, Beamrouting), and the field BeamGroupingConfig is a newly added field for the beam training scheme in this embodiment of the application, where R is the number of beam directions in each group , S is the total number of beams supported by the network device, and Beamrouting is used to indicate the division result of H-order beam division.
  • Beamrouting is a sequence with a length of HS, and the value of all elements in the sequence is an integer between 0 and S-1.
  • the sequence with the length of HS can indicate the H-order beam division result of the network device.
  • Beamrouting is a random seed value.
  • the network device and the terminal device scramble the sequence ⁇ 0,1,...,S-1 ⁇ H times based on the random seed and the same random number generating function, and
  • the H sequences are sequentially combined into a pseudo-random sequence with a length of HS.
  • the pseudo-random sequence can also indicate the H-order beam division result of the network device. If this method is adopted, the beam division in step 1 of the network device is also based on the pseudo-random sequence.
  • a random sequence is divided.
  • the random number generation function is pre-configured by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the nrofReportedBeam field in the reference signal reporting command is set to V. V may be the number of effective beams between the network device and the terminal device estimated by the network device.
  • the network device may indicate the R codewords corresponding to each reference signal through the first method or the second method in step 3 of the method 200 .
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether the network device adopts the first mode or the second mode through relevant signaling, or it may not indicate, and the network device and the terminal device default to one of them according to certain predefined rules.
  • Way. CSI-reporting can also indicate the manner in which the terminal equipment reports the indication information.
  • the manner in which the terminal equipment reports the indication information may be periodic reporting or semi-static reporting or aperiodic reporting.
  • the resources configured in step 2 are also periodic, and the period for the terminal equipment to report the indication information is the same as the period for the resources in step 2, which is T period , in this way, it can be ensured that the terminal device can report the indication information once by measuring the reference signal of one cycle.
  • the relationship between the reported time TR and the period of resource configuration needs to be satisfied or 8 shows a reporting time T R of a selectable time range, Indicates that the terminal device needs to report the measurement result after receiving and processing the last reference signal under one division and before the end of one cycle, Indicates that the terminal device needs to report the measurement result before the first reference signal is received in the next cycle.
  • the resources configured in step 2 may be periodic or semi-static, and the period at which the terminal equipment reports the indication information is the same as the resource in step 2.
  • the period is the same, that is, the period is T period . In this way, it can be ensured that the terminal device can report the indication information once by measuring the reference signal of one cycle.
  • the relationship between the reported time TR and the period of resource configuration needs to be satisfied or satisfied or
  • the resources configured in step 2 may be periodic or semi-static or aperiodic.
  • the network device needs to send a report instruction, and the terminal device reports the instruction information once.
  • Step 4 the network device sends 2-port NZP-CSI-RS on the resource configured in step 2.
  • the network device in step 4 sends the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS, see step 4 in the example of method 200.
  • Step 5 The terminal device measures the 2-port NZP-CSI-RS in step 4, obtains the amplitude and phase of the two-port reference signal according to the measurement, and normalizes the received reference signal according to the method in step 5 of method 200. The gain for each beam direction is then estimated.
  • Step 6 the terminal device reports the reference signal measurement result to the network device, and the measurement result includes the indices of the V beam directions.
  • a method for selecting V beam directions is to select V beam directions with the largest gains for reporting according to the estimation result in step 5 .
  • the terminal device quantifies the amplitude or energy of the corresponding effective beam before reporting.
  • the energy information may include RSRP information.
  • the configuration information sent by the second device to the first device in methods 200 and 300 may include one or more parameters. parameter, it may be sent through one configuration information or multiple different configuration information, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first device can distinguish multiple effective beams with different delays in the delay domain, and report multiple effective beams for one reference signal codeword, that is, V>W, thereby enhancing the ability to distinguish and estimate each effective beam.
  • the beam training method of the present application is described below with reference to the embodiment of the method 400 in FIG. 9 .
  • S401 is the same as S201.
  • the second device configures one reference signal resource set for each group of beams, that is, configures M reference signal resource sets.
  • the second device may configure the index of each reference signal resource set in the M reference signal resource sets, the time-frequency resource position of each reference signal resource in each reference signal resource set, and the information included in each reference signal resource set.
  • each reference signal resource set in the M reference signal resource sets occupies multiple two-port subband reference signal resources on different subcarriers, and the frequency intervals of the multiple two-port subband reference signal resources are the same.
  • the M reference signal resource sets correspond to the M wideband two-port reference signals.
  • a reference signal resource set and a corresponding wideband reference signal may be identified by a reference signal resource set index.
  • One subband reference signal resource and one corresponding subband reference signal may be identified by one subband reference signal resource index.
  • Each wideband reference signal in the M wideband reference signals is associated with a group of beams in S401, in other words, a wideband reference signal, a reference signal resource set, a reference signal resource set index, and a group of beams are any of the four There is a one-to-one correspondence between the two.
  • the reference signals appearing in the method 400 are by default wideband reference signals unless otherwise indicated.
  • the reference signal resource set index may also be referred to as the index of the wideband reference signal.
  • the wideband reference signal in the method 400 may be referred to as a reference signal for short, and the index of the wideband reference signal may be referred to as "reference signal index" for short, and the index of the reference signal is used to indicate a wideband reference signal sequence and the time-frequency resource position corresponding to the reference signal sequence. .
  • three reference signal resource sets corresponding to three groups of beams are shown, and one reference signal resource set corresponding to each group of beams includes three two-port subband resources, and any two of them in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain interval of adjacent two-port subband resources is the same.
  • the number of beams corresponding to each reference signal is greater than 2.
  • the terminal device can measure one reference signal to determine measurement results of multiple beams, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the second device may configure a periodic, semi-static or aperiodic reference signal resource set for the multiple times of beam grouping in S401.
  • the second device may configure the resources occupied by the grouped beams to the first device in a broadcast, multicast or unicast manner.
  • the second device sends third configuration information for beam training to the first device, where the third configuration information is used to configure L codewords.
  • the L codewords and the M reference signals have an associated relationship.
  • each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword among the L codewords.
  • the mth reference signal among the M reference signals is associated with R m codewords among the L codewords.
  • each reference signal there is at least one reference signal associated with at least two codewords in the L codewords. For example, if the codewords associated with the two reference signals are not equal, one reference signal is associated with L. Two of the codewords, and the other reference signal is associated with one of the L codewords. For another example, when the codewords associated with each reference signal are equal, each reference signal is associated with two codewords or more than two codewords among the L codewords.
  • the L codewords configured by the second device through the third configuration information are in one-to-one correspondence with the L beams in S401, or the L codewords are in one-to-one correspondence with the L spatial filtering parameters. Therefore, the mth reference signal among the M reference signals is also associated with R m spatial filtering parameters (beams) among the L spatial filtering parameters, and a codeword associated with the mth reference signal is associated with the mth reference signal. A beam in a set of beams is associated.
  • the first device receives the third configuration information for configuring the codeword, and can indicate the effective beam by reporting the codeword.
  • the configuration method of the L codewords and the association relationship between the L codewords and the M reference signals can be divided into three cases.
  • the three cases are the same as the cases one, two and three in S203.
  • the third configuration information may further configure the number of codewords or codeword indices indicated by the indication information sent by the first device to be V.
  • the third configuration information configures the first device to report the first indication information with different options.
  • the different reporting options are the same as reporting options 1 and 2 in S203.
  • the third configuration information in options 1 and 2 may further configure the first device to report at least one of amplitude information or energy information of the V codewords.
  • S404 is the same as S204.
  • the first device measures the reference signal sent by the second device in S404, and sends fifth indication information to the second device.
  • the first device performs normalization processing on the received reference signal according to the signal agreed by the second device and the first device.
  • the specific steps are the same as the normalization method in S205.
  • the first indication information reported by the first device indicates indices of W reference signals, and an index of a codeword or codeword associated with each of the W reference signals, wherein the The wth reference signal among the W reference signals is associated with vw codewords, the W reference signals are reference signals among the M reference signals, vw is a positive integer, and
  • the first device first selects W reference signals from the M reference signals as the reference signals to be reported.
  • a method for selecting the W reference signals is: selecting W among the M reference signals with larger energy or amplitude. larger reference signal. Then, according to the measurement results on the two ports of the W reference signals, v w codewords are determined for each reference signal.
  • a method for determining a codeword is method 1, which specifically includes two steps: 1) for a reference signal that needs to be reported, the first device uses the 2-port wideband reference signal on each port according to the frequency domain respectively; The sequence is sorted into two frequency domain signal sequences, and then the two sequences are transformed into the time domain by discrete Fourier transform or inverse discrete Fourier transform to obtain a two-port time domain signal sequence. 2) According to the selection of vw indices in the two-port time domain sequence, the method for determining the vw indices may be to compare the amplitude (or energy) of the time domain signal of the first port with the amplitude (or energy) of the time domain signal of the second port.
  • the first device may report v w pieces of location index information for each of the reported W reference signals.
  • Another method for determining a codeword is method 2.
  • the specific steps are: 1) the same as 1) of the first method; 2) for each position index of the two-port time domain sequence, the phase difference between the two ports can be determined according to the phase difference between the two ports.
  • the v w codewords corresponding to the w beams are determined as the codewords to be reported.
  • the method for determining the indices of the vw codewords is the same as that of option 1 in S205.
  • the fifth indication information reported by the first device includes reporting V codewords or V codeword indices.
  • the process of determining the V codewords by the first device is the same as the above-mentioned option 1.
  • the method for determining the V codeword indices is the same as the second option in S205.
  • the first device reports sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information indicates at least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information of the V codewords. At least one of the first amplitude information or the first energy information is a quantized result, and the specific quantization manner and precision may be predefined or configured by the second device.
  • the third configuration information in S403 may be the first configuration information in method 200
  • the fifth indication information in S405 may be the first indication information in method 200 .
  • the beam training method is extended to the broadband reference signal scenario, in the case that a group of beams may include one or more effective beams, the broadband reference signal is transformed into the time delay domain, so as to have different Multiple effective beams that are extended at the same time are distinguished to improve effective beam detection and estimation capabilities.
  • the following describes the process of determining the beam in the method 400 in detail.
  • the following description takes the example of uniformly dividing the beam, the reference signal is NZP-CSI-RS, the first device is a terminal device, and the second device is a network device, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • Step 1 divide the beam.
  • step 1 Same as step 1 under method 200 .
  • Step 2 configure resources.
  • the network device configures multiple 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for each group of beams in each division.
  • a group of beams in one beam division corresponds to multiple 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources.
  • the time domain of each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource is the same and the interval in the frequency domain is also the same.
  • multiple 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources corresponding to a group of beams are equal sub-carriers at the same time interval resource.
  • the multiple 2-portNZP-CSI-RS resources form a 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource set, and the network device can send multiple subband reference signals on each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource set to form a set of 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources.
  • the reference signal is an abbreviation of wideband reference signal.
  • a group of beams corresponds to 3 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources
  • the 3 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources constitute a 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource set
  • 3 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources Three two-port subband reference signals can be sent on the resource to form a wideband reference signal.
  • the network device can configure 3*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for one division, and configure 3*H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for H divisions.
  • the 3*H*M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources configured by the network device may be periodic or semi-static or aperiodic.
  • the network device can use the resource index to indicate each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource. If the network device has configured U 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources for multiple groups of beams, it can use 1,...u..., U, u represents the indices of U 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources, and of course, 0, 1, ... u..., U-1 can also represent the indices of U 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources.
  • the network device can use the resource set index to indicate each 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource set. If the network device has configured M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource sets for multiple groups of beams, it can use 1,... , m, ..., M, m represent the index of M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resource sets, of course, 0, 1, ..., M-1 can also be used to represent M 2-port NZP-CSI-RS resources The index of the collection.
  • step 2 For periodic or semi-static or aperiodic resources, reference may be made to the description of step 2 under method 200 .
  • Step 3 measure the configuration.
  • the network device sends a CSI-reporting command to the terminal device, where the CSI-reporting command includes information used to instruct the terminal device on which resources configured in step 2 to measure the reference signal.
  • the value of the nrofBeamEachRS field in the CSI-reporting command is R
  • the field nrofBeamEachRS is a newly added field for the beam training scheme in this embodiment of the application
  • R is the number of beam directions in each group in step 1 .
  • the network device may indicate at least one codeword corresponding to each reference signal in two manners. For the method of configuring at least one codeword for each reference signal, refer to method 200 for example in method 1 or method 2 in step 3.
  • the network device can indicate to the terminal device whether the configuration code word adopted by the network device is Mode 1 or Mode 2 through relevant signaling, or it may not indicate. one of the first and the second.
  • the nrofReportedRS field in the reference signal reporting instruction is set to W, which indicates that the terminal needs to report the measurement results of W reference signals among the M reference signals.
  • the network device may configure the specific content reported by the terminal device for each reference signal in the CSI-reporting instruction as:
  • the network device can configure the terminal device to report: the resource set index corresponding to the reference signal, and the The phase quantization value of the two ports measured on each two-port resource under the reference signal resource set.
  • the method of phase quantization can be defaulted to convert the phase to a phase between [0, 2 ⁇ ), and then perform uniform quantization of Xbit on it.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: a two-port amplitude quantization value measured on each two-port resource under the reference signal resource set.
  • the network device may configure the field nrofDelayTaps to be E through the CSI-reporting command.
  • the terminal device needs to sort the received 2port reference signals in the frequency domain sequence into two frequency domain signal sequences, and then use the discrete Fourier transform for the two sequences. The change is transformed into the time domain to obtain a two-port time domain signal sequence.
  • the terminal equipment needs to report: the resource set index corresponding to the reference signal and the quantized phase difference value of the two-port time domain signal at the E position indices.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: E position indices of the two-port time domain signal.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: the amplitude quantization value of the two-port time domain signal at the E position indices.
  • the network device may configure the field nrofDelayTaps to be E through the CSI-reporting command.
  • the terminal device needs to sort the received set of 2port reference signals according to the frequency domain sequence, respectively, into two frequency domain signal sequences, and then transform the two sequences into the time domain using discrete Fourier transform to obtain two ports. time domain signal sequence.
  • the terminal device needs to report: the reference signal resource set index corresponding to the reference signal and the codeword index corresponding to the E position indexes of the two-port time domain signal.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: E position indices of the two-port time domain signal.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: the amplitude quantization value of the two-port time domain signal at the E position indices.
  • the network device may configure the field nrofBeams to be K through the CSI-reporting command.
  • the network equipment configures the terminal equipment to report: the reference signal resource set index corresponding to the reference signal and the K codeword indexes corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal reported by the network device instructing the terminal device may further include: energy corresponding to the K codewords.
  • the method of indicating both the reference signal resource set and the codeword index can also be indicated by the codeword index.
  • the network device can configure the terminal device not to report the reference signal resource set index, but to report the code. word index.
  • the corresponding options are applicable to configuring at least one codeword associated with each reference signal in the above-mentioned CSI-reporting using the second method.
  • the CSI-reporting may also indicate a manner in which the terminal equipment reports the measurement result of the reference signal, and the manner in which the terminal equipment reports the measurement result of the reference signal may be periodic reporting, semi-static reporting, or aperiodic reporting.
  • the manner in which the terminal equipment reports the measurement result of the reference signal may be periodic reporting, semi-static reporting, or aperiodic reporting.
  • Step 4 is the same as step 4 in the method 200 .
  • Step 5 the terminal device measures the reference signal sent in step 4, and reports the measurement result to the network device.
  • the terminal equipment measures them, and obtains the measurement results on each reference signal as: in and are the normalization results obtained from the first port and the second port of the f-th subband reference signal included in a broadband reference signal of the m-th beam group under the h-th division, both of which are complex numbers.
  • the value of f is 1, ..., F, where F is the number of two-port subband reference signals included in a wideband reference signal.
  • the terminal device first selects W reference signals from all the M reference signals received as the reference signal group to be reported.
  • a possible implementation is to select The largest W reference signals; another possible implementation is to choose The largest W reference signals.
  • the weighted average coefficients ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are configured in advance by the network device or default to default values.
  • the reference signal corresponds to the mth group of beams under the hth division, where the value of h is 1, ..., H, and the value of m is 1, ..., M.
  • the terminal device reports the measurement result of the reference signal according to the configuration option of the network device in step 3:
  • the terminal equipment reports the reference resource set index corresponding to the reference signal, and at the same time reports the corresponding 2-port NZP-CSI-RS under the reference signal.
  • the terminal equipment reports the reference resource set index corresponding to the reference signal, and at the same time reports the corresponding 2-port NZP-CSI-RS under the reference signal. in, Express quantized value with phase between [0,2 ⁇ ), Express Quantized value with phase between [0, 2 ⁇ ).
  • the network device is configured with the amplitude information that the terminal device needs to report the measured value of the reference signal, the terminal device also needs to report and Amplitude quantization value of and
  • the terminal device converts the frequency domain sequence and Perform discrete Fourier transforms separately to obtain time-domain sequences and Then select E position indices.
  • a possible method for selecting the E position indices may be, selecting from 1 to F The largest E index f, another possible method is to choose from 1 to F The largest E indices f.
  • the terminal equipment reports: the resource set index corresponding to the reference signal and the and The phase difference quantization value at these E position indices.
  • the terminal device also needs to report the above-selected E location indices.
  • the network device is configured with the amplitude information that the terminal device needs to report the measured value of the reference signal, the terminal device also needs to report and Amplitude quantization value at the above E position indices.
  • the terminal device reports: the resource set index corresponding to the reference signal, and Corresponding codeword indices at these E position indices.
  • the corresponding codeword can be determined according to the phase difference between the two sequences at the E position indices and at least one codeword associated with the reference signal.
  • reference may be made to the second option in step 5 of the method 200 as an example.
  • the terminal device also needs to report the above-selected E location indices.
  • the network device is configured with the amplitude information that the terminal device needs to report the measured value of the reference signal, the terminal device also needs to report and Amplitude quantization value at the above E position indices.
  • the terminal device needs to report: the resource set index corresponding to the reference signal, and the indices of K codewords in at least one codeword bound to the reference signal.
  • the time-domain sequence is obtained by discrete Fourier transform and For each position index f, refer to option 3 of S405, which can be based on and and at least one codeword associated with the reference signal to determine a codeword, denote the index of the codeword in the at least one codeword associated with the reference signal as r(f), and then select the required code according to the following algorithm The reported K codewords.
  • Output Output the largest K position indices in the P elements as the indices of the K codewords to be reported.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are the energy weight values of the two ports respectively, which can be set by default or configured by the network device.
  • the terminal device also needs to report the element values of the vector P on the K indices.
  • the terminal device may not report the reference signal resource set index, but report the codeword index, and determine the code.
  • the process of word is the same as option 3 and option 4.
  • the process of determining the codeword index refer to option 3 of step 5 in method 200.
  • Step 6 the network device may determine one or more beams, and there may be two or more beams in the one or more beams that belong to the same group of beams divided in step 1.
  • the terminal equipment reports W reference signal resource set indices, and the phase quantization values of corresponding two-port reference signals under each reference signal resource set. Then, the network device determines the corresponding codeword according to the reported phase difference between the two ports of each reference signal, so as to further determine the effective beam direction. For the method of determining the effective beam direction, reference may be made to method 200 for example, case 1 corresponding to option 1 reported in step 6 . If the terminal device also reports the amplitude quantization value of each two-port reference signal, for a reference signal, the network device can refer to option 4 in step 5 to estimate the gain of each beam direction, and repeat this method for each reference signal to obtain Gain estimates for all beam directions from which the transmit beam is further selected.
  • the terminal device reports the W reference signal resource set indices and the quantized phase difference values of the corresponding two-port time domain signals at the E position indices. Then, the network device determines the corresponding codeword according to the reported phase difference between the two ports of each reference signal, so as to further determine the effective beam direction. For the method of determining the effective beam direction, reference may be made to the method 200 as an example of case 1 of option 1 in step 6.
  • the network device can refer to option 4 in step 5 to estimate the gain of each beam direction, and for each reference signal The method is repeated for the reference signal to obtain gain estimates for all beam directions, and then further transmit beams are selected from them.
  • the terminal device reports W reference signal resource set indices and codeword indices on the E position indices of the corresponding two-port time domain signals, and the network device can determine the effective beam direction according to the codeword.
  • the method of determining the effective beam direction reference may be made to the method 200 as an example of case 1 of option 2 in step 6. If the terminal device also reports the amplitude quantization value of each two-port time domain signal at these E position indices, for a reference signal, the network device can refer to option 4 in step 5 to estimate the gain of each beam direction, and for each reference signal The method is repeated for the reference signal to obtain gain estimates for all beam directions, and then further transmit beams are selected from them.
  • the network device can determine the effective beam direction according to the codewords. For the method of determining the effective beam direction, reference may be made to the method 200 as an example of case 1 of option 2 in step 6. If the terminal device also reports the energy information corresponding to each codeword, the network device can obtain the gain estimation of each beam direction, and then further select a transmission beam from it.
  • method 400 can distinguish multiple beams in a group of beams by introducing additional time-delay domain information, thereby improving beam training accuracy while saving beam training time.
  • the index of a certain parameter may start from 0 or may also start from 1, for example, the indices of R m codewords are 0, 1, 2, ..., R m ⁇ 1, can also be 1, 2, ..., R m .
  • the indices of the M reference signals are respectively 0, 1, 2...M-1, and may also be 1,2...M.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • At least one codeword among the L codewords associated with each reference signal in the M reference signals may be understood as: a codeword associated with one reference signal among the M reference signals The number is one or more.
  • the presence of at least one reference signal in the M reference signals is associated with at least two codewords among the L codewords can be understood as: the number of codewords associated with one or more reference signals in the M reference signals The number of codewords associated with the reference signal may be one.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the first device or the terminal device in the above method embodiments may also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the first device or the terminal device.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the second device or the network device in the above may also be implemented by components (eg, chips or circuits) usable in the second device or the network device.
  • each device such as a first device or a second device or a terminal device or a network device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to performing the functions in order to implement the above functions.
  • a device such as a first device or a second device or a terminal device or a network device
  • the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered outside the scope of protection of this application.
  • the first device or the second device may be divided into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing unit. in the module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and other feasible division manners may be used in actual implementation. The following description will be given by taking as an example that each function module is divided corresponding to each function.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 500 includes a sending unit 510 and a receiving unit 520 .
  • the sending unit 510 can send signals to the outside, and the receiving unit 510 can receive external signals.
  • the transmitting unit 510 and the receiving unit 520 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus 500 may be configured to perform the actions performed by the first device or the second device in the above method embodiments.
  • the apparatus 500 may be referred to as the first device or the second device, and the sending unit 510 is configured to perform the above actions.
  • the receiving unit 520 is configured to perform operations related to receiving on the side of the first device or the second device in the above method embodiments.
  • the apparatus 500 is configured to implement the operations performed by the first device in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving unit 520 is configured to receive first configuration information for beam training, where the first configuration information configures L codewords associated with M reference signals, and each reference signal in the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords. At least one of the codewords, where M and L are positive integers.
  • the sending unit 510 is configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the first indication information indicates that the device 500 according to the determined by the measurement of M reference signals.
  • the apparatus 500 is configured to implement the operations performed by the first device in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving unit 520 is configured to receive second configuration information for beam training, where the second configuration information configures the M reference signals to be associated with L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords, and each of the M reference signals is associated with L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords.
  • the reference signal is associated with at least one codeword in the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter in the L spatial filtering parameters, where M and L are positive integers;
  • the sending unit 510 is configured to send second indication information, the second The indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters among the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the second indication information is based on the measurement of the M reference signals by the apparatus 500, the L codes word and the L spatial filtering parameters.
  • the apparatus 500 is configured to implement the operations performed by the second device in the above method embodiments.
  • the sending unit 510 is configured to send first configuration information for beam training, where the first configuration information configures L codewords associated with M reference signals, and each reference signal in the M reference signals is associated with the L codewords.
  • M and L are positive integers;
  • the receiving unit 520 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, and V is less than or equal to A positive integer of L.
  • the apparatus 500 is configured to implement the operations performed by the second device in the above method embodiments.
  • the sending unit 510 is configured to send second configuration information for beam training, where the second configuration information configures L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords associated with M reference signals, each of the M reference signals.
  • the reference signal is associated with at least one codeword in the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter in the L spatial filtering parameters, and M and L are positive integers;
  • the receiving unit 520 is configured to receive second indication information, the second The indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters among the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the apparatus 500 of each of the above solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the first device or the second device in the above method; the function may be implemented by hardware or software, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions; for example, the sending unit can be replaced by a communication interface, the receiving unit can be replaced by a communication interface, and other units, such as the determination unit, can be replaced by a processor, which respectively executes each method. Transceiver operations and related processing operations in the embodiments.
  • a communication interface of an apparatus is used for the apparatus to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing
  • the communication interface may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, information exchange.
  • the above-mentioned devices may be respectively arranged on chips that are independent of each other, or at least part or all of them may be arranged on the same chip.
  • the processor can be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor, wherein the analog baseband processor and the communication interface can be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor can be provided on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip.
  • a digital baseband processor can be combined with a variety of application processors (such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) integrated on the same chip.
  • application processors such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.
  • Such a chip may be called a system on chip (SOC).
  • SOC system on chip
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 600 .
  • the apparatus 600 includes a processor 610 , a communication interface 620 and a memory 630 .
  • the processor 610, the communication interface 620 and the memory 630 are coupled to communicate with each other, the memory 630 is used to store instructions, and the processor 610 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 630 to control the communication interface 620 to send signals and/or receive signal.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 610 is configured to control the communication interface 620 to receive first configuration information for beam training, where the first configuration information configures M reference signals
  • the associated L codewords each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword among the L codewords, M and L are positive integers
  • the processor 610 is further configured to control the communication interface 620 to send the first indication information, the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the first indication information is determined by the apparatus 600 according to the measurement of the M reference signals.
  • the communication interface 620 is configured to receive the first configuration information and send the first indication information according to the control of the processor 610 .
  • the processor 610 is configured to control the communication interface 620 to receive second configuration information for beam training, where the second configuration information configures M reference signal associations L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords, each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword among the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter among the L spatial filtering parameters, M and L is a positive integer; the processor 610 is further configured to control the communication interface 620 to send second indication information, where the second indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters in the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, The second indication information is determined according to the measurement of the M reference signals, the L codewords and the L spatial filtering parameters by the apparatus 600 .
  • the communication interface 620 is configured to receive the second configuration information and send the second indication information according to the control of the processor 610 .
  • the processor 610 is configured to control the communication interface 620 to send first configuration information for beam training, where the first configuration information configures the M reference signals associated with L codewords, each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword of the L codewords, and M and L are positive integers.
  • the processor 610 is further configured to control the communication interface 620 to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates V codewords in the L codewords, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, and the first indication information is:
  • the M reference signals are determined by the measurement of the first device.
  • the processor 610 is configured to control the communication interface 620 to send second configuration information for beam training, where the second configuration information configures the M reference signals associated with L spatial filtering parameters and L codewords, each of the M reference signals is associated with at least one codeword among the L codewords and at least one spatial filtering parameter among the L spatial filtering parameters, M and L is a positive integer; the processor 610 is further configured to control the communication interface 620 to receive second indication information, the second indication information indicates V spatial filtering parameters in the L spatial filtering parameters, where V is a positive integer less than or equal to L, The second indication information is determined according to the measurement of the M reference signals by the first device, the L codewords, and the L spatial filtering parameters.
  • the communication interface 620 is configured to send the second configuration information and receive the second indication information according to the control of the processor 610 .
  • apparatus 500 in FIG. 11 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by the apparatus 600 in FIG. 12 , and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes corresponding to the first device and the second device in the above method embodiments.
  • the methods, processes, operations or steps involved in the various designs described in the embodiments of the present application can be in a one-to-one correspondence manner through computer software, electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. corresponding implementation. Whether these functions are implemented in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. For example, considering the good versatility and low cost of software and hardware decoupling, it can be implemented by executing program instructions. , Considering the system performance and reliability, it can be realized by using a dedicated circuit. Those of ordinary skill can implement the described functions using different methods for each particular application, which are not limited here.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method in the above-mentioned embodiment. .
  • the various embodiments in this application can also be combined with each other.
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable medium, where program codes are stored in the computer-readable medium, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the methods in the foregoing embodiments. .
  • a processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field programmable gate array, FPGA), or other possible solutions. Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • Programming logic devices discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate Synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative, and the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, for example, multiple units or components may be combined.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one physical entity, or each unit may correspond to a single physical entity, or two or more units may be integrated into one physical entity.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Optical Communication System (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)
  • Aiming, Guidance, Guns With A Light Source, Armor, Camouflage, And Targets (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种用于波束训练的方法和装置。第一设备接收到用于波束训练的第一配置信息，可以根据第一配置信息确定M个参考信号关联的L个码字，第一设备可以测量M个参考信号，根据测量结果在L个码字中确定V个码字，并上报指示V个码字的第一指示信息，这样，接收第一指示信息的设备就可以根据V个码字确定有效波束，从而可以实现波束训练。

Description

用于波束训练的方法和装置
本申请要求于2020年12月25日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202011568911.6、申请名称为“用于波束训练的方法和装置”，以及，要求于2020年7月20日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202010699812.5、申请名称为“一种CSI上报方法”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且更具体地涉及通信领域中用于波束训练的方法和装置。
背景技术
随着通信技术的发展，为了提高网络吞吐量，需要利用毫米波频段来获取更多的资源，但是毫米波频段的衰减比较大，设备之间需要利用波束成型(beam forming)进行波束配对提高信道的增益。因此，亟需一种确定波束的方法。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种用于波束训练的方法和装置，能够使得第二设备确定波束。
第一方面，提供了一种用于波束训练的方法，所述方法可由第一设备执行，第一设备可以是能够支持第一设备实现该方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片系统。包括：第一设备接收用于波束训练的第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，所述M和所述L是正整数；
所述第一设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，所述第一指示信息是所述第一设备根据所述M个参考信号的测量和L个码字确定的。
在上述方案中，第一设备接收到用于波束训练的第一配置信息，可以根据第一配置信息确定M个参考信号关联的L个码字，第一设备可以测量M个参考信号，根据测量结果在L个码字中确定V个码字，并上报指示V个码字的第一指示信息，这样，接收第一指示信息的设备就可以根据V个码字确定有效波束。
进一步地，L个码字对应L个波束，接收第一指示信息的设备拥有L个码字和L个波束的对应关系，这样，接收第一指示信息的设备就可以根据V个码字可以确定V个有效波束，V个有效波束各不相同或者部分波束相同。接收第一指示信息的设备可以进一步在V个有效波束中筛选发送信号的波束。
本申请实施例中提到的波束为：第二设备向第一设备发送信号的波束，即第二设备的发送波束。
可选地，第一设备可以对M个参考信号中的部分或者全部参考信号进行测量确定第一指示信息。
可选地，M个参考信号也可以是第一配置信息配置的或者是不同于第一配置信息的其 他配置信息配置的，本申请不予限制。换句话说，第一配置信息既可以配置M个参考信号以及与M个参考信号关联的L个码字，也可以只配置与M个参考信号关联的L个码字，M个参考信号是其他配置信息配置的。
可选地，M个参考信号与M组波束一一对应。
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述第一配置信息包括M个第一字段，所述M个第一字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号相关联的码字。
在上述方案中，第一配置信息包括的M个第一字段分别用于承载M个参考信号关联的码字，这样可以将M个参考信号相关联的码字直接通过M个第一字段携带。
可选地，如果每个参考信号相关联的码字都相同，则第一配置信息包括一字段，该字段承载每个参考信号相关联的码字。
结合第一方面的第一种或者第二种可能的实现方式中，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
所述第一指示信息包括所述V个码字的索引，所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000001
或
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000002
其中，R m为所述第m个参考信号关联的码字数量，m＝1，2，……，M。
结合第一方面的第一种至第三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第四种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
所述第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字的索引，所述W个参考信号为所述M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000003
在上述方案中，一个参考信号可以与一组波束绑定，第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字索引，接收第一指示信息的设备可以根据W个参考信号确定W组波束，根据各个参考信号关联的码字索引在W组波束可以确定V个有效的波束。
可选地，W＝V，v w＝1，即一组波束中存在一个有效波束，接收第一指示信息的设备共可以确定W或者V个有效的波束。
可选地，W小于V，存在一个v w大于1，即存在一组波束中存在一个以上的有效波束，接收第一指示信息的设备可以根据W个参考信号的索引确定W组波束，若一个参考信号对应的v w大于1，则接收第一指示信息的设备根据v w个码字的索引在该参考信号对应的一组波束确定多个有效波束。
结合第一方面的第一种至第四种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第五种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示所述V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个。
这样，接收第三指示信息的设备可以根据V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个确定有效波束的增益。
结合第一方面的第一种至第五种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第六种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，所述第一设备根据如下假设对所述第m个参考信号进行测量：
所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据s 1确定的；和/或，
所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据t i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；
其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数。
可选地，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联可以理解为：t i为所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字或者所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字的形式与t i有关。
可选地，第m个参考信号包括两个端口可以理解为第m个参考信号占两个端口的资源，两个端口上利用多个波束发送的信号共同形成了一个参考信号。这样，当一组波束包括两个以上的波束时，第一设备可以根据在两个端口资源上接收到的一个参考信号的测量结果实现对多个波束的测量，从而可以节省资源开销。
结合第一方面的第一种至第六种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第七种可能的实现方式中，所述第一配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000004
在上述方案中，码字数量与码字具有对应关系，第一设备根据第一配置信息配置的码字数量确定码字。
结合第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第八种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000005
结合第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第九种可能的实现方式中，具体为：
所述R m、参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字。
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，在第十种可能的实现方式中，所述R m、所述参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的码字，具体为：
所述第m个参考信号关联的所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m是与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000006
其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。
结合第一方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，θ m＝2mπ/Y，其中，Y为大于或等于M和max mR m的质数，max mR m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值；或者，若R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，则θ m＝2mπ/MR，m＝1，2，……，M。
可选地，在上述方案中，码字的形式可以是行向量的形式或者列向量的形式，即所述R m个码字中的所述第i个码字形式为B×[1；t i]，或，B×[1，t i]，B为复数常数。
结合第一方面的第一种至第十一种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，具体为：
所述M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少两个码字。
在上述方案中，由于L个码字与L个波束对应，由于存在一个参考信号关联至少两个码字，则相当于一个参考信号与至少两个波束关联，则第一设备可以针对的一个参考信号的测量进而实现对至少两个波束的测量，从而可以节省时间和参考信号开销。
结合第一方面的第一种至第十二种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十三种可能的 实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字各不相同。换句话说，每个参考信号关联的至少一个码字不存在相同的码字，这样，与一个参考信号关联的一组波束可以通过不同码字进行区分。
结合第一方面的第一种至第十三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号为M个信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)。
第二方面，提供了一种用于训练波束的方法，所述方法可由第一设备执行，第一设备可以是能够支持第一设备实现该方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片系统。包括：第一设备接收用于波束训练的第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；
所述第一设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示所述L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V为小于或等于L的正整数，所述第二指示信息是根据所述第一设备对所述M个参考信号的测量、所述L个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数确定的。
可选地，L个空间滤波参数与L个码字一一对应，L个空间滤波参数与L个波束一一对应。换句话说，L个空间滤波参数、L个码字与L个波束任意两者一一对应。
可选地，M个参考信号也可以是第二配置信息配置的或者是不同于第二配置信息的其他配置信息配置的，本申请不予限制。换句话说，第二配置信息既可以配置M个参考信号以及与M个参考信号关联的L个码字和L个空间滤波参数，也可以只配置与M个参考信号关联的L个码字和L个空间滤波参数，M个参考信号是其他配置信息配置的。
可选地，M个参考信号与M组波束一一对应。
在上述方案中，第一设备接收到用于训练波束的第二配置信息，可以根据第二配置信息确定M个参考信号关联的L个码字的L个空间滤波参数，第一设备可以测量M个参考信号，根据测量结果确定V个空间滤波参数，并上报指示V个空间滤波参数的第二指示信息，这样，接收第二指示信息的设备就可以根据V个空间滤波参数确定有效波束。
可选地，第一设备可以对M个参考信号中的部分或者全部参考信号进行测量确定第二指示信息。
结合第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述第二配置信息包括M个第二字段，所述M个第二字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号配置相关联的空间滤波参数和相关联的码字。
在上述方案中，第一配置信息包括的M个第二字段分别用于承载M个参考信号关联的码字和空间滤波参数，这样可以将M个参考信号相关联的码字和空间滤波参数直接通过M个第一字段携带。
结合第二方面的第一种或者第二种可能的实现方式中，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息指示所述V个空间滤波参数对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个。
这样，接收第四指示信息的设备可以根据V个空间滤波参数对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个确定有效波束的增益。
结合第二方面的第一种至第三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第四种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，所述第一设备根据如下假 设对所述第m个参考信号进行测量：
所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据∑b i×s 1确定的，i＝1，2，……，R m；和/或，
所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据∑t ib i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；
其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数，b i为所述第m个参考信号关联的第i个空间滤波参数。
可选地，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联可以理解为：t i为所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字或者所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字的形式与t i有关。
可以理解的是，b i为所述第m个参考信号关联的第i个波束对应的空间滤波参数。
可选地，第m个参考信号包括两个端口可以理解为第m个参考信号占两个端口的资源，两个端口上利用多个波束发送的信号共同形成了一个参考信号。这样，当一组波束包括两个以上的波束时，第一设备可以根据在两个端口资源上接收到的一个参考信号的测量结果实现对多个波束的测量，从而可以节省资源开销。
结合第二方面的第一种至第四种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第五种可能的实现方式中，所述第二配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量和关联的空间滤波参数的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于或等于L的正整数，m为小于或等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000007
在上述方案中，码字数量与码字具有对应关系，第一设备根据第一配置信息配置的码字数量确定码字。
结合第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，在第六种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000008
结合第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，在第七种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m、参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字。
结合第二方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第八种可能的实现方式中，所述R m、所述参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的码字，具体为：
所述第m个参考信号关联的所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m是与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000009
其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。
结合第二方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，在第九种可能的实现方式中，θ m＝2mπ/Y，其中，Y为大于或等于M和max mR m的质数，max mR m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值；或者，若R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，则θ m＝2mπ/MR，m＝1，2，……，M。
在一些可能的实现方式中，在上述方案中，码字的形式可以是行向量的形式或者列向量的形式，即所述R m个码字中的所述第i个码字形式为B×[1；t i]，或，B×[1，t i]，B为复数常数。
结合第二方面的第一种至第九种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十种可能的实现 方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，具体为：
所述M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少两个码字。
在上述方案中，由于L个码字与L个波束对应，由于存在一个参考信号关联至少两个码字，则相当于一个参考信号与至少两个波束关联，则第一设备可以针对的一个参考信号的测量进而实现对至少两个波束的测量，从而可以节省时间和参考信号开销。
结合第二方面的第一种至第十种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字各不相同。换句话说，每个参考信号关联的至少一个码字不存在相同的码字，这样，与一个参考信号关联的一组波束可以通过不同码字进行区分。
结合第二方面的第一种至第十一种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号为M个CSI-RS。
第三方面，提供了一种用于训练波束的方法，所述方法可由第二设备执行，第二设备可以是能够支持第二设备实现该方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片系统。包括：第二设备发送用于波束训练的第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，M和L是正整数；
所述第二设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，所述第一指示信息是所述第一设备所述M个参考信号的测量和L个码字确定的。
进一步地，L个码字对应L个波束，第二设备拥有L个码字和L个波束的对应关系，这样，第二设备就可以根据第一指示信息中的V个码字确定V个有效波束，V个有效波束各不相同或者部分波束相同。第二设备可以进一步在V个有效波束中筛选发送信号的波束。
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述第一配置信息包括M个第一字段，所述M个第一字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号相关联的码字。
在上述方案中，第一配置信息包括的M个第一字段分别用于承载M个参考信号关联的码字，这样可以将M个参考信号相关联的码字直接通过M个第一字段携带。
可选地，如果每个参考信号相关联的码字都相同，则第一配置信息包括一字段，该字段承载每个参考信号相关联的码字。
结合第三方面的第一种或者第二种可能的实现方式中，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
所述第一指示信息包括所述V个码字的索引，所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000010
或
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000011
其中，R m为所述第m个参考信号关联的码字数量，m＝1，2，…，M。
结合第三方面的第一种至第三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第四种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
所述第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字 的索引，所述W个参考信号为所述M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000012
结合第三方面的第一种至第四种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第五种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第二设备接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示所述V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个。
结合第三方面的第一种至第五种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第六种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，所述第二设备根据如下准则发送所述第m个参考信号：
所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据s 1确定的；和/或，
所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据t i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数。
结合第三方面的第一种至第六种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第七种可能的实现方式中，所述第一配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000013
结合第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第八种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000014
结合第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第九种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m、参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字。
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，在第十种可能的实现方式中，所述R m、所述参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的码字，具体为：
所述第m个参考信号关联的所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m是与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000015
其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。
结合第三方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，θ m＝2mπ/Y，其中，Y为大于或等于M和max mR m的质数，max mR m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值；或者，若R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，则θ m＝2mπ/MR，m＝1，2，……，M。
可选地，在上述方案中，码字的形式可以是行向量的形式或者列向量的形式，即所述R m个码字中的所述第i个码字形式为B×[1；t i]，或，B×[1，t i]，B为复数常数。
结合第三方面的第一种至第十一种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，具体为：
所述M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少两个码字。
在上述方案中，由于L个码字与L个波束对应，由于存在一个参考信号关联至少两个 码字，则相当于一个参考信号与至少两个波束关联，则第一设备可以针对的一个参考信号的测量进而实现对至少两个波束的测量，从而可以节省时间和参考信号开销。
结合第三方面的第一种至第十二种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字各不相同。换句话说，每个参考信号关联的至少一个码字不存在相同的码字，这样，与一个参考信号关联的一组波束可以通过不同码字进行区分。
结合第三方面的第一种至第十三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号为M个CSI-RS。
第四方面，提供了一种用于训练波束的方法，所述方法可由第二设备执行，第二设备可以是能够支持第二设备实现该方法所需的功能的装置，例如芯片系统。包括：
第二设备发送用于波束训练的第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；
所述第二设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示所述L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V是小于或等于L的正整数。
结合第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述第二配置信息包括M个第二字段，所述M个第二字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号配置相关联的空间滤波参数和相关联的码字。
结合第四方面的第一种或者第二种可能的实现方式中，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第二设备接收第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息指示所述V个空间滤波参数对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个。
结合第四方面的第一种至第三种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第四种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，所述第二设备根据如下准则发送第m个参考信号：
所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据∑b i×s 1确定的，i＝1，2，……，R m；和/或，
所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据∑t ib i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数，b i为所述第m个参考信号关联的第i个空间滤波参数。
结合第四方面的第一种至第四种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第五种可能的实现方式中，所述第二配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m和关联的空间滤波参数的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于或等于L的正整数，m为小于或等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000016
结合第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，在第六种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000017
结合第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，在第七种可能的实现方式中，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
所述R m、参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字。
结合第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，在第八种可能的实现方式中，所述R m、所述参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的码字，具体为：
所述第m个参考信号关联的所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m是与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000018
其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。
结合第四方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，在第九种可能的实现方式中，θ m＝2mπ/Y，其中，Y为大于或等于M和max mR m的质数，max mR m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值；或者，若R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，则θ m＝2mπ/MR，m＝1，2，……，M。
在一些可能的实现方式中，在上述方案中，码字的形式可以是行向量的形式或者列向量的形式，即所述R m个码字中的所述第i个码字形式为B×[1；t i]，或，B×[1，t i]，B为复数常数。
结合第四方面的第一种至第九种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，具体为：
所述M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少两个码字。
在上述方案中，由于L个码字与L个波束对应，由于存在一个参考信号关联至少两个码字，则相当于一个参考信号与至少两个波束关联，则第一设备可以针对的一个参考信号的测量进而实现对至少两个波束的测量，从而可以节省时间和参考信号开销。
结合第四方面的第一种至第十种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字各不相同。换句话说，每个参考信号关联的至少一个码字不存在相同的码字，这样，与一个参考信号关联的一组波束可以通过不同码字进行区分。
结合第四方面的第一种至第十一种中任意一种可能的实现方式中，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，所述M个参考信号为M个CSI-RS。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种用于训练波束的装置，该装置包含在电子设备中，该装置具有实现上述第一方面及上述第一方面的可能实现方式中第一设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如，装置可以包括发送单元和接收单元等。
第六方面，本申请提供了一种用于训练波束的装置，该装置包含在电子设备中，该装置具有实现上述第二方面及上述第二方面的可能实现方式中第一设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如，装置可以包括发送单元和接收单元等。
第七方面，本申请提供了一种用于训练波束的装置，该装置包含在电子设备中，该装置具有实现上述第三方面及上述第三方面的可能实现方式中第二设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如，装置可以包括发送单元和接收单元等。
第八方面，本申请提供了一种用于训练波束的装置，该装置包含在电子设备中，该装置具有实现上述第四方面及上述第四方面的可能实现方式中第二设备行为的功能。功能可 以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如，装置可以包括发送单元和接收单元等。
第九方面，提供一种用于训练波束的装置，所述装置包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得第一方面中的方法被执行。
例如，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得该装置执行第一方面中的方法。
可选地，该装置包括的处理器为一个或多个。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括与处理器耦合的存储器。
可选地，该装置包括的存储器可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括收发器。
第十方面，提供一种用于训练波束的装置，所述装置包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得第二方面中的方法被执行。
例如，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得该装置执行第二方面中的方法。
可选地，该装置包括的处理器为一个或多个。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括与处理器耦合的存储器。
可选地，该装置包括的存储器可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括收发器。
第十一方面，提供一种用于训练波束的装置，所述装置包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得第三方面中的方法被执行。
例如，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得该装置执行第三方面中的方法。
可选地，该装置包括的处理器为一个或多个。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括与处理器耦合的存储器。
可选地，该装置包括的存储器可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括收发器。
第十二方面，提供一种用于训练波束的装置，所述装置包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得第四方面中的方法被执行。
例如，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得该装置执行第四方面中的方法。
可选地，该装置包括的处理器为一个或多个。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括与处理器耦合的存储器。
可选地，该装置包括的存储器可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，该装置中还可以包括收发器。
第十三方面，提供了一种用于训练波束的系统，包括：第五方面和第七方面的装置；或者包括第六方面和第八方面的装置。或者包括：第九方面和第十一方面的装置；或者包括第十方面和第十二方面的装置。
第十四方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现第一方面或者第一方面中的方法的计算机程序(也可称为指令或代码)。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以执行第一方面中的方法。
第十五方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现第二方面或者第二方面中的方法的计算机程序(也可称为指令或代码)。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以执行第二方面中的方法。
第十六方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现第三方面或者第三方面中的方法的计算机程序(也可称为指令或代码)。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以执行第三方面中的方法。
第十七方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现第四方面或者第四方面中的方法的计算机程序(也可称为指令或代码)。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以执行第四方面中的方法。
第十八方面，本申请提供一种芯片，包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以执行第一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
可选地，所述芯片还包括存储器，存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接。
进一步可选地，所述芯片还包括通信接口。
第十九方面，本申请提供一种芯片，包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以执行第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
可选地，所述芯片还包括存储器，存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接。
进一步可选地，所述芯片还包括通信接口。
第二十方面，本申请提供一种芯片，包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以执行第三方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
可选地，所述芯片还包括存储器，存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接。
进一步可选地，所述芯片还包括通信接口。
第二十一方面，本申请提供一种芯片，包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以执行第四方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
可选地，所述芯片还包括存储器，存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接。
进一步可选地，所述芯片还包括通信接口。
第二十二方面，本申请提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序(也可称为指令或代码)，所述计算机程序被计算机执行时使得所述计算机实现各方面中的方法。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例提供的通信系统示意图。
图2是本申请实施例提供的用于波束训练的方法示意图。
图3是本申请实施例提供的两端口资源的示意图。
图4是本申请实施例提供的参考信号资源的示意图。
图5是本申请实施例提供的另一参考信号资源的示意图。
图6是本申请实施例提供的另一用于波束训练的方法示意图。
图7是本申请实施例提供的又一参考信号资源的示意图。
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一参考信号资源的示意图。
图9是本申请实施例提供的又一用于波束训练的方法示意图。
图10是本申请实施例提供的又一参考信号资源的示意图。
图11是本申请实施例提供的用于训练波束的装置的示意性框图。
图12是本申请实施例提供的另一用于训练波束的装置的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
应理解，本申请实施例中的方式、情况、类别以及实施例的划分仅是为了描述的方便，不应构成特别的限定，各种方式、类别、情况以及实施例中的特征在不矛盾的情况下可以相结合。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的“第一”、“第二”以及“第三”仅为了区分，不应对本申请构成任何限定。还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本申请实施例可以应用于各种通信系统，例如，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、第五代移动通信(the 5th Generation，5G)系统、机器与机器通信(machine to machine，M2M)系统、侧行链路通信系统(Sidelink)或者未来演进的其它通信系统，如6G系统。其中，5G的无线空口技术称为新空口(new radio，NR)，5G系统也可称为NR系统。
首先介绍本申请的应用场景，图1是一种适用于本申请的通信系统的示意图。
图1是设备间通信系统100的示意图。该无线通信设备可以包括一个或多个网络设备，例如图1中的网络设备110。终端设备120可以与网络设备110进行通信，例如图1中，网络设备110与终端设备120进行通信。终端设备120发送数据给网络设备110的链路称为上行链路(uplink)，而终端设备120接收网络设备110发送的数据的链路称为下行链路(downlink)。
可选地，该无线通信系统100还可以包括其他终端设备，其他终端设备和终端设备120之间可以直接进行通信。终端设备与终端设备的通信可以称为车辆对其他设备(vehicle to everything,V2X)，或者设备到设备(device to device，D2D)等。V2X通信可以看成是D2D通信的一种特殊情形。
新无线(new radio，NR)接入技术是目前主流的无线通信技术，其针对V2X业务特性及新的业务需求，可以支持更低延迟、更高可靠性的V2X通信。V2X是实现智能汽车、自动驾驶、智能交通运输系统的基础和关键技术。V2X可以包括车到互联网(vehicle to  network，V2N)、车到车(vehicle to-vehicle，V2V)、车到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)、车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)等。V2N通信是目前应用最广泛的车联网形式，其主要功能是使车辆通过移动网络，连接到云服务器，使用云服务器提供的导航、娱乐、防盗等应用功能。V2V通信可以用于车辆间信息交互和提醒，最典型的应用是用于车辆间防碰撞安全系统。通过V2I通信，车辆可以与道路甚至其他基础设施，例如交通灯、路障等通信，获取交通灯信号时序等道路管理信息。V2P通信可以用于对道路上的行人或非机动车的安全警告。
终端设备120可以是固定位置的，也可以是可移动的。图1只是示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备，如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备，在图1中未画出。本申请的实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的网络设备和终端设备的种类和数量不作限定。
在移动通信系统100中，终端设备120通过无线方式接入到该移动通信系统中的网络设备。该网络设备110可以是：基站、演进型基站(evolved node B，eNB)、家庭基站、无线保真(wireless fidelity，WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point，TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)等，还可以为NR系统中的gNB，或者，还可以是构成基站的组件或一部分设备，如汇聚单元(central unit，CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)或基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)等。
该移动通信系统100中的终端设备120也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)等。本申请实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑，还可以是应用于虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、运输安全(transportation safety)、智慧城市(smart city)以及智慧家庭(smart home)等场景中的无线终端。本申请中将前述终端设备及可应用于前述终端设备的芯片统称为终端设备。应理解，本申请实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
应理解，图1中仅为便于理解，示意性地示出了终端设备120、网络设备110，但这不应对本申请构成任何限定，该无线通信系统中还可以更多数量的网络设备，也可以包括更多或更少数量的终端设备，本申请对此不做限定。
本申请实施例中的第一设备可以是终端设备120，第二设备可以是网络设备110；或者第一设备可以是终端设备120，第二设备可以是其他终端设备。
下面将本申请涉及到的术语进行详细的介绍：
1、波束(beam)
波束在NR协议中的体现可以是空间滤波参数(spatial domain filter parameter)，或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameter)。用于发送信号的波束可以称为发送波束(transmission beam，Tx beam)，可以称为空间发送滤波参数(spatial domain transmission filter parameter)或空间发射参数(spatial transmission parameter)；用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam，Rx beam)，可以称为空间接收滤波参数(spatial domain receive filter parameter)或空间接收参数(spatial RX parameter)。
波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间上信号能量集中的方向，接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间上能量集中的方向。
此外，波束可以是宽波束，或者窄波束，或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。换句话说，一个特定的波束对应了一个特定的空间滤波参数或波束赋形参数(例如波束成形矢量/参数)，下文中，波束、空间滤波参数和波束赋形参数中的任意两个可以认为是一一对应的。
在波束测量中，不同的参考信号一般对应不同的波束，即发送端采用不同的波束在不同的资源上发送不同的参考信号，因此可以以参考信号资源索引来标识参考信号资源对应的波束。不同的发送波束是由不同的空间滤波参数确定的。
2、参考信号资源
在波束测量中，发送端可以通过在不同的参考信号资源上发送参考信号，不同的参考信号由不同的空间滤波参数来进行波束赋形，接收端在不同的参考信号资源上对不同的参考信号进行测量，从而确定波束的质量。参考信号包括但不限于探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)、CSI-RS、小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal，CS-RS)、UE专用参考信号(user equipment specific reference signal，US-RS)、以及同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block，SS/PBCH block)。其中，SS/PBCH block可以简称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block，SSB)。
3、参考信号端口
一个参考信号可以具有一个或多个端口。不同的端口可以占用不同的时频资源和/或不同的码域资源。
为了提高NR系统的吞吐量，需要利用毫米波频段来获取更大的带宽资源。而毫米波频段的信道衰减非常大，网络设备和终端设备需要利用多天线波束赋形技术在特定方向上打波束从而提高传输的信道增益，保证信号的覆盖。并且，该波束赋形技术为模拟波束赋形，即通过移项器对参考信号进行波束赋形。在整个通信带宽上，一个移项器在一个时刻只能取一个值，故模拟波束赋形技术需要通过多个不同的时刻来切换不同的波束。为了在众多可能的波束中找到合适的波束方向，3GPP NR Relase 15/16标准化引入了波束训练过程。以下行波束训练为例，该过程为：网络设备在多个时间单元(例如，正交频分复用(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing，OFDM)符号或时隙)上发送多个参考信号，不同参考信号由不同的波束进行波束赋形。终端设备测量不同的参考信号，确定不同参考信号对应的波束的质量，并上报波束质量较好的参考信号的资源索引，波束质量较好的参考信号的资源索引用于辅助网络设备判断使用哪些波束进行后续的通信会具有较好的信号质量，在本申请实施例中，为方便描述，称这些具有较好的信号质量的波束为有效波束。在3GPP NR Release 15/16的标准中，针对下行波束训练，终端设备测量参考信号的接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)，并上报若干个RSRP较大的参考信号资源索引。但是，在毫米波波段，为了保证波束赋形增益，各波束覆盖的网络区域较小，即一般使用窄波束。此外，网络设备和/或终端设备一般需要扫描很多波束方向，因此造成波束训练需要的时间单元很多，波束训练花费的时间很长，不能完成快速波束训练。例如存在128个波束，则需要占用128个时间单元。
本申请实施例提供一种快速波束训练方法，可以降低波束训练的时延，降低波束训练带来的参考信号开销。
下面结合附图描述本申请实施例提供的用于波束训练的方法200。如图2所示方法200包括但不限于：
S201，第二设备对L个波束进行分组，得到分组后的M组波束，L和M为正整数。
示例性地，第二设备可以对L个波束进行均匀分组或者非均匀分组，得到划分后的每组波束，一次划分对应多个波束的一种分组方式。
其中，L个波束中的每个波束都对应了一个空间滤波参数，例如波束成形矢量，用于确定第二设备在该波束上发送信号的实施方式。故下文中空间滤波参数和波束可以认为是一一对应的。
需要说明的是，S201是可选步骤，可以不存在S201，即不用每次对多个波束进行分组，即波束按照默认方式划分。
可选地，分组后的每组波束包括的波束数量大于2。
S202，第二设备向第一设备配置M个参考信号资源。
其中，S202中，第二设备向第一设备配置M个参考信号资源具体为配置M个参考信号资源的时频资源位置、M个参考信号资源索引、M个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源对应的端口数量等。
可以理解的是，参考信号资源索引也可称为参考信号的索引。
可选地，第二设备为网络设备，第一设备为终端设备。
可选地，M个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源具有两个端口，如图3所示。M个参考信号资源对应了M个两端口参考信号。一个参考信号资源以及其对应的一个参考信号可以由一个参考信号资源索引标识。M个参考信号中每个参考信号与S201中的一组波束相关联，换句话说，一个参考信号，一个参考信号资源，一个参考信号资源索引，一组波束这四者任意两者间具有一一对应的关联关系。下文中参考信号资源索引也可称为参考信号的索引。示例性地，第二设备根据各参考信号对应的各波束组，在发送参考信号时确定各参考信号的空间滤波参数，例如波束赋形参数。从而使能第一设备通过测量不同的参考信号获得不同波束的测量结果。
可选地，上述M个参考信号中，各参考信号对应的波束数量均大于2。即第二设备通过一个参考信号资源即可扫描多个波束。相比于现有3GPP NR Release 15/16的标准中，本申请实施例可以降低波束扫描需要的时间和参考信号开销。
可选地，在S202中，针对S201的多次波束分组划分第二设备可以配置周期性的、半静态的或非周期的参考信号资源。
可选地，第二设备可以通过广播或者组播或者单播的方式向第一设备配置M个参考信号资源。
S203，第二设备向第一设备发送用于波束训练的第一配置信息，第一配置信息配置L个码字。
其中，L个码字和M个参考信号具有关联关系。M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联L个码字中的至少一个码字。
可选地，M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联L个码字中的至少两个码字。 例如，存在两个参考信号关联的码字不相等的情况下，一个参考信号关联L个码字中的两个码子，另一个参考信号关联L个码字中的一个码字。又例如，在每个参考信号关联的码字相等的情况下，每个参考信号都关联L个码字中的两个码字或者两个以上的码字。
可选地，M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联L个码字中的R m个码字，R m为小于或等于L的正整数。
可选地，第二设备通过第一配置信息配置的L个码字与S201中的L个波束对应，或者L个码字与L个空间滤波参数一一对应。因此，第m个参考信号还关联L个空间滤波参数中的R m个空间滤波参数(波束)，且第m个参考信号关联的一个码字与第m个参考信号关联的一组波束中的一个波束相关联。第一设备接收配置码字的第一配置信息，可以通过上报指示码字的第一指示信息对有效波束进行指示。
L个码字的配置方法以及L个码字和M个参考信号的关联关系可分为如下三种情况。
情况一，第一配置信息中显式地指示M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字。即第一配置信息包括M个第一字段，M个第一字段分别用于承载M个参考信号相关联的码字。可选地，第一配置信息中显式指示的第m个参考信号关联码字的方法，可以参考情况二中的预定义的第一规则和/或情况三中的预定义的第二规则。
情况二，第一配置信息配置M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，R m用于根据预定义的第一规则确定第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000019
可选地，若M个参考信号每个参考信号关联的码字数量相等，可通过一个统一的字段来指示每个参考信号关联的码字数量R，即此时R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R。
可选地，预定义的第一规则为：R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，例如A＝1，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000020
在情况二下，各参考信号关联的码字可以相同也可以不同。举例来说，若第一配置信息指示第1个参考信号和第2个参考信号关联的码字个数R 1＝R 2＝4，第3个参考信号关联的码字个数R 3＝5，则第1个参考信号和第2个参考信号关联的码字均为{exp(j×0)，exp(j×π/2)，exp(j×π)，exp(j×3π/2)}，第3个参考信号关联的码字为{exp(j×0)，exp(j×2π/5)，exp(j×4π/5)，exp(j×6π/5)，exp(j×8π/5)}。
情况三，第一配置信息配置M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，R m以及参考信号数量M用于根据预定义的第二规则确定第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000021
预定义的第二规则使得L个码字中任意两个码字都不相同。
可选地，第二规则为：第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数例如A＝1，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000022
其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。该情况下各参考信号关联的码字均不相同。
可选地，θ m＝2mπ/Y或θ m＝2(m-1)π/Y，其中Y为大于M和max mR m的质数，其中，max mR m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值。
可选地，当R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，θ m＝2mπ/MR。
可选地，M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000023
或
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000024
举例来说，若第一配置信息指示第1个参考信号和第2个参考信号关联的码字个数R 1＝R 2＝4，第3个参考信号关联的码字个数R 3＝5，总参考信号个数为M＝3，此时Y＝7，则第1个参考信号关联的码字为{exp(j×2π/7)，exp(j×11π/14)，exp(j×9π/7)，exp(j×25π/14)}；第2个参考信号关联的码字{exp(j×4π/7)，exp(j×15π/14)，exp(j×11π/7)，exp(j×29π/14)}；第3个参考信号关联的码字为{exp(j×6π/7)，exp(j×44π/35)，exp(j×58π/35)，exp(j×72π/35)，exp(j×86π/35)}。总共配置了L＝13个码字，各个码字的索引为0-12或者为1-13。
可选地，在情况二和情况三中，各码字的形式也可以为列向量形式B×[1；t i]或行向量形式B×[1，t i]，B为常数，例如，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000025
例如上述情况二码字exp(j×π/2)对应到列向量形式为B×[1；exp(j×π/2)]或行向量形式为B×[1，exp(j×π/2)]，此时A＝1。又例如上述情况三中码字exp(j×2π/7)对应到列向量形式为B×[1；exp(j×2π/7)]或行向量形式为B×[1，exp(j×2π/7)]，此时A＝1。
在实际应用中，可以允许部分波束组按照情况一和/或情况二配置码字，剩余波束组按照情况三配置码字。
针对不同情况下的码字配置方法，第二设备向第一设备发送第一配置信息，第一配置信息配置第一设备以不同的选项上报第一指示信息。
选项一，若第一配置信息按照情况一或情况二配置码字，第一配置信息可以指示第一设备上报参考信号的数量为W，与W个参考信号关联的码字的数量为V。
这样，基于选项一，第一设备在S205中上报的第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字或码字的索引，其中，对于W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号，上报关联的v w个码字或码字索引，W个参考信号为M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000026
对于V个码字中的第v个码字，其索引为该码字在与其对应参考信号关联码字中的索引。这样，第二设备根据第一设备上报的一个参考信号资源索引，在S202中参考信号资源索引和波束组对应关系中可以确定一组波束，进一步的，根据上述该参考信号下码字和波束的对应关系，第二设备通过第一设备上报的与上报参考信号关联的一个码字在该组波束中确定一个波束，该确定的波束即为第一设备上报的有效波束。举例来说，第一配置信息按照上述情况二中举例配置码字，第一设备上报第2个参考信号的索引以及码字exp(j×π/2)对应的索引，则其上报的参考信号资源索引为第2个参考信号对应的索引，上报的码字索引为exp(j×π/2)在{exp(j×0)，exp(j×π/2)，exp(j×π)，exp(j×3π/2)}中的索引，即1(各码字索引为0-3)或2(各码字索引为1-4)。第二设备收到S205中第一设备上报的第一指示信息之后就能确定第一设备上报的有效波束是第2个参考信号关联的波束组中的第2个波束。
选项二，若第一配置信息按照情况一配置了L个各不相同的码字或按情况三配置L个各不相同的码字，第一配置信息可以配置第一设备上报码字的数量为V或者码字索引的数量为V。
这样，基于选项二，第一设备在S205中上报的第一指示信息包括V个码字或V个码字索引，第一指示信息指示的V个码字为第一配置信息配置的L个码字中的V个码字。对于V个码字中的第v个码字，其索引为该码字在L个码字中的索引。示例性地，M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000027
或
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000029
根据码字和波束的对应关系，第二设备可以通过第一设备上报的一个码字直接确定一个波束，该确定的波束即为第一设备上报的有效波束。举例来说，第一配置信息按照上述情况三中举例配置码字，第一设备上报与第二个参考信号关联的多个码字中的码字exp(j×15π/14)对应的索引，则其上报的码字索引为exp(j×15π/14)在{exp(j×2π/7)，exp(j×4π/7)，exp(j×11π/14)，exp(j×6π/7)，exp(j×15π/14)，exp(j×44π/35)，exp(j×9π/7)，exp(j×11π/7)，exp(j×58π/35)，exp(j×25π/14)，exp(j×29π/14)，exp(j×72π/35)，exp(j×86π/35)}中的索引，即4(各码字索引为0-12)或5(各码字索引为1-13)。第二设备收到S205中第一设备上报的第一指示信息之后就能确定第一设备上报的有效波束是第2个参考信号关联的波束组中的第2个波束。
可选地，选项一、选项二中第一配置信息还可以配置第一设备上报V个码字的幅度信息和/或能量信息。例如，能量信息包括RSRP信息。
可选地，S203中第二设备发送的第一配置信息可以指示第一设备上报S205中第一指示信息的方式，例如可以是周期性上报或者是半静态上报或者是非周期上报。当然，S203中第二设备发送的第一配置信息也可以不指示第一设备上报测量结果的方式，第一设备采用默认的上报方式。
可以理解的是，S202与S203可以是在同一个消息中发送也可以是在不同的消息中发送，本申请实施例不予限制。
可以理解的是，第二设备可以针对一次波束划分执行一次S203，也可以针对多次划分执行一次S203。
S204，第二设备在S202中向第一设备配置的资源上发送M个参考信号。
针对一次划分，第二设备在S202中向第一设备配置的资源上通过和配置的资源相对应的各组波束发送两端口参考信号，若S201中第二设备对波束进行了多次划分，则S204执行多次。
可选地，第二设备发送M个参考信号中的第m个参考信号时，第m个参考信号具有2个端口。其中，第二设备根据第m个参考信号对应的R m个波束确定端口1的参考信号的波束赋形参数；根据第m个参考信号对应的R m个波束和第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字确定端口2的波束赋形参数。其中，第m个参考信号对应的波束由第二设备确定，参考S201。第m个参考信号关联的至少一个码字由第一配置信息确定，参考S202。
示例性地，第m个参考信号对应的一组波束中各波束的波束赋形参数(例如波束成形矢量)为{b i},i＝1，2，……，R m，其中b i是该组波束中第i波束方向的波束成形矢量，例如可以为离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transformation，DFT)基底中的一个矢量，R m为第二设备向第一设备通过第一配置信息配置的第m个参考信号关联的码字个数。端口1的波束赋形参数是根据∑b i确定的，端口1发送的参考信号是根据∑b i×s 1确定的。端口2的波束赋形参数是根据∑t ib i确定的，其中t i为第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字，具体形式可参考S203中的第一配置信息配置码字的过程，端口2发送的参考信号是根据∑t ib i×s 2确定的。其中s 1和s 2为第二设备和第一设备约定的在端口1和端口2上的信号，例如可沿用NR中根据该参考信号两端口对应的资源元素(resource element，RE)位置确定信号s 1和s 2。该参考信号发送方法使得第二设备发送一个参考信号时能扫描多个方向，同时参考信号的第二端口在不同波束方向上乘上了不同的码字，使能第一设备判断接收到的参考信号来自于第二设备的哪个发送波束。此外，码字t i设置成复平面单位圆上的点使 得发送的参考信号没有幅度损失，能起到一定的抗噪效果。
可选地，第一设备根据如下假设对第m个参考信号进行测量：
两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据s 1确定的；和/或，
两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据t i×s 2确定的，t i为第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字，i＝1，2，……，R m；
可选地，对于第m个参考信号，第一设备确定第二设备通过该组波束的各个波束方向在第一个端口上都发送s 1，通过该组波束的各个方向在第二个端口上分别发送t i×s 2。
S205，第一设备对S204中第二设备发送的参考信号进行测量后，向第二设备发送第一指示信息。
可选地，第一设备对接收到的参考信号按照第二设备和第一设备约定的方式进行归一化处理。举例来说，针对S204举例中的第m个参考信号，第一设备确定第二设备通过该组波束的各个波束方向在第一个端口上都发送s 1，通过该组波束的各个方向在第二个端口上分别发送t i×s 2。则第一设备在S205中将接收到的第一个端口信号和第二个端口信号分别除以s 1和s 2再进行后序处理。
可选地，若S203中第二设备在第一配置信息中指示第一设备上报第一指示信息的方式，则第一设备按照第一配置指示信息上报第一指示信息。若S203中第二设备在第一配置信息中没有指示第一设备上报第一指示信息的方式，则第一设备按照默认的方式向第二设备上报第一指示信息。
可选地，针对M个参考信号，第一设备根据S203中第一配置信息指示的不同上报选项上报第一指示信息。
针对选项一，第一设备上报的第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字或码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字。
示例性地，第一设备首先从M个参考信号中选取W个参考信号作为需要上报的参考信号，一种选取W个参考信号的方法可以为选取M个参考信号中W个能量较大或者幅度较大的参考信号。然后第一设备根据W个参考信号的两端口上的测量结果，确定每个参考信号的v w个码字。一种确定码字的方法是，对于一个需要上报的参考信号，测量该参考信号上两端口的测量相位差，然后在该参考信号关联的至少一个码字中选取与该相位差差距最小的码字。针对选项一，码字对应的索引为该码字在该参考信号对应的R m个码字中的索引。举例来说，若第一配置信息指示的码字与S203中情况二中举例的码字一致。第二设备在S203的第一配置信息中指示第一设备按照选项一上报1个参考信号资源索引以及1个码字，即此时W＝1，V＝1。第一设备接收到3个参考信号，且其中第2个参考信号RSRP能量最大，第2个参考信号两端口间的相位差为0.4π，第2个参考信号关联的码字为{exp(j×0)，exp(j×π/2)，exp(j×π)，exp(j×3π/2)}，显然码字exp(j×π/2)和exp(j×0.4π)最接近，故第一设备上报第2个参考信号的索引以及码字exp(j×π/2)或码字exp(j×π/2)的索引(各码字索引为0-3时上报码字索引为1，各码字索引为1-4时上报码字索引为2)。
针对选项二，第一设备上报的第一指示信息包括上报V个码字或码字索引。则第一设备首先从M个参考信号中选取W个参考信号作为需要上报的参考信号，选取的方法可参考上述选项一。然后根据W个参考信号两端口上的测量结果确定V个码字。一种确定码字的方法是，对于一个需要上报的参考信号，测量该参考信号上两端口的测量相位差，然 后选取该参考信号关联的至少一个码字中和该相位差的差距最小的码字。举例来说，若第一配置信息中指示的码字与S203中情况三中举例的码字一致，第二设备在S203的第一配置信息中指示第一设备按照选项二上报1个码字，即此时V＝1。第一设备接收到3个参考信号，且其中第2个参考信号RSRP能量最大，第2个参考信号两端口间的相位差为π，第2个参考信号关联的码字为{exp(j×4π/7)，exp(j×15π/14)，exp(j×11π/7)，exp(j×29π/14)}，显然码字exp(j×15π/14)和exp(j×π)最接近，根据S203中选项二中的举例，码字exp(j×15π/14)在所有L个码字中的索引为4(各码字索引为0-12)或5(各码字索引为1-13)。故第一设备上报码字exp(j*15π/14)或其索引。
可选地，第一设备向第二设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息指示V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个，V个码字对应的第一幅度信息包括V个码字中各个码字对应的幅度信息。V个码字对应的第一能量信息包括V个码字中各个码字对应的能量信息。第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个是量化后的结果，具体的量化方式和精度可以是预定义的也可以是第二设备配置的。
S206，第二设备根据第一指示信息，对第二设备和第一设备间的各个波束进行估计，确定发送信号的一个或多个波束。第二设备可以根据L个码字和L个波束间的对应关系，以及第一设备上报的码字即可确定第二设备和第一设备之间的有效发送波束。
可选地，若第一设备上报了相应的幅度信息和/或能量信息，则第二设备还可根据第一设备上报的幅度信息和/或能量信息对确定的各有效波束的增益进行估计，根据幅度信息和/或能量信息对有效波束进行进一步挑选。
在上述方法200中，第二设备可以对多个波束进行多次分组，通过多次分组尽可能使得覆盖第二设备与第一设备之间多个有效的径的波束出现在不同的分组中，避免一个以上的有效的径被同一组波束中的波束覆盖的情形，从而导致第一设备无法通过参考信号测量结果估计有效波束。第二设备为每组波束配置一个两端口参考信号。第一设备通过一个两端口参考信号对该组波束中的多个波束进行测量，从而可以提升波束训练速度，降低参考信号开销。第二设备配置每个参考信号关联多个码字，该多个码字中每个码字关联一个波束，第二设备在发送该两端口参考信号时，第二端口的信号在对不同波束方向乘以其对应码字，即不同波束方向上两端口相位差不同。在毫米波频段，由于信道的稀疏特性，第二设备和第一设备之间存在的有效径个数非常少，在天线阵子数较多的情况下，一组波束中的有效的波束数不超过1的概率非常大，所以当第一设备接收到的参考信号能量较大时，其中大部分能量很大概率来自于一个波束方向。有效波束方向不同，第一设备接收到的参考信号的两端口相位差不同，从而在多个波束方向共用参考信号资源的情况下可以推断出有效波束方向。举例来说，第二设备支持64个波束，现有技术中，一个波束对应一个参考信号资源，共64个参考信号资源，第二设备在各个波束对应的资源上发送参考信号，第一设备对参考信号进行测量，上报测量结果(如RSRP)以及参考信号资源索引，第二设备可以根据参考信号资源索引以及测量结果确定波束，而在本申请实施例中，第二设备对支持的64个波束进行划分，划分为16组，每组4个波束，则第二设备需要配置16个两端口参考信号以及16组波束对应的码字，一组波束对应一个两端口参考信号，第一设备对两端口参考信号进行测量，上报的测量结果包括参考信号的索引以及码字，或者只上报码字，这样，网络设备可以根据参考信号的索引确定至少一组波束，根据码字在至少一 组波束中确定波束，或根据码字直接确定波束，从而可以节省资源开销。
下面具体描述方法200中的确定波束的过程。下面以对波束进行均匀划分、参考信号为CSI-RS，第一设备为终端设备，第二设备为网络设备为例描述，但本申请实施例不限于此。
步骤1、划分波束。
网络设备共支持S个可选的波束。网络设备可以将S个可选波束进行H次划分，每次划分将S个波束分成M组，每组的波束包括R个波束(有一组划分波束方向数可以不足R)，一个波束对应一个波束方向。H、S，M和R为正整数。例如，H＝1，S＝64，M＝16，则R＝4。
根据全连接射频通道天线阵子结构、多pannel天线结构或者其他的天线结构，网络设备能够同时在R个波束方向上发送不同的参考信号。
步骤2、配置资源。
网络设备为每次划分中的每组波束配置一个2-port非零功率CSI-RS(non zero power CSI-RS，NZP-CSI-RS)资源，换句话说，一次波束划分中的一组波束对应一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源。如网络设备可以针对一次划分配置M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，H次划分配置H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源。网络设备配置的H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的或者非周期的，每个2-port NZP-CSI-RS与一次划分中的一组波束绑定。
对于周期性资源，网络设备需要配置一个周期内至少有M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，且这M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源需要在不同的符号内，这样，网络设备在发送M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS时，能够在时间上错开。
此外，如网络设备配置的周期性资源的周期为T period，第M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源结束时刻相对周期的偏移(offset)为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000030
第1个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源结束时刻相对周期的偏移(offset)为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000031
则需要保证
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000032
T proc为终端设备接收到一个周期的参考信号后对一个周期的参考信号的处理时间，T proc可以是终端设备和网络设备通过信令交换确定的。换句话说，网络设备配置的周期性的资源需要保证两个周期之间终端设备有足够的时间处理一个周期的参考信号。如图4所示，RS(h,1)表示第h次划分中一个周期T period内的第一个参考信号资源，RS(h,2)表示第h次划分中一个周期T period内的第二个参考信号资源，RS(h,M)表示第h次划分中一个周期T period内的第M个参考信号资源。RS(h+1,1)表示第h+1次划分中一个周期T period内的第一个参考信号资源，RS(h+1,M)表示第h+1次划分中一个周期T period内的第M个参考信号资源。第h次划分和第h+1次划分属于H划分中的两次相邻的划分。
对于半静态资源，网络设备需要配置一个周期内至少有M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，且这M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源需要在不同的符号内，这样，网络设备在M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上通过M组波束发送参考信号时，能够在时间上错开。并且网络设备配置的半静态资源需要处于激活状态下能够维持至少H个周期。且需要保证
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000033
这些参数的描述参考周期性配置的资源。
对于非周期的资源，网络设备需要配置H个NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集合包括M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集合中的2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源需要在不同的符号内，这样，网络设备在M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上通过M组波束发送参考信号时，能够在时间上错开。
步骤3、测量配置。
网络设备向终端设备发送CSI-reporting指令，CSI-reporting指令用于配置终端设备测量参考信号，并上报测量结果。CSI-reporting指令包括用于指示终端设备在步骤2中配置的哪些资源上测量参考信号的信息，CSI-reporting指令中的nrofBeamEachRS字段的取值为R，字段nrofBeamEachRS为本申请实施例针对本波束训练方案新增字段，R为步骤1中每组波束方向数量。网络设备可以通过两种方式指示每个参考信号对应的R个码字，即：
方式一，网络设备通过配置每组波束方向数量R间接配置了每个参考信号对应的R个码字均为{exp(j×0)，exp(j×2π/R)，exp(j×4π/R)，……，exp(j×2(R-1)π/R)}，对应上述方法200的情况二。
方式二，网络设备通过配置每组波束方向数量R和参考信号数量M，从而间接配置第m个参考信号对应的R个码字为{exp(j×0+j×2mπ/Y)，exp(j×2π/R+j×2mπ/Y)，exp(j×4π/R+j×2mπ/Y)，……，exp(j×2(R-1)π/R+j×2mπ/Y)}，m＝0～M-1或者m＝1～M。
其中，Y为大于M和R的最小质数，或者，Y＝MR，对应上述方法200情况三。
可选地，网络设备可以通过相关信令向终端设备指示网络设备采用的是方式一还是方式二，也可以不进行指示，网络设备和终端设备根据某种预定义的规则默认其中的某一种方式。
参考信号上报指令中的nrofReportedRS字段设置为W，即指示终端设备需要上报M个参考信号中的W个参考信号的测量结果。W可以是网络设备估计的网络设备与终端设备之间的有效径(也称为有效的波束)的数量。
可选地，网络设备可以配置终端设备对于每个参考信号上报的具体内容为：
选项一，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字或利用方式二配置码字或不配置码字时，网络设备可以配置终端设备上报：该参考信号资源索引，以及该索引对应的参考信号的两端口相位差量化结果。相位差量化的方式可以默认为将相位差转换成[0,2π)间的相位差，然后进行X比特的均匀量化。
选项二，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字或利用方式二配置码字时，网络设备可以配置终端设备上报：该参考信号资源索引，以及与该参考信号关联的一个码字在与该参考信号关联所有码字中的索引。对应上述方法S203选项二中上报V＝W个码字。
选项三，当上述CSIreporting中利用方式二配置码字时，网络设备配置终端设备上报：该参考信号下的一个码字或该码字在所有码字中的索引。对应上述方法S203选项三中上报V＝W个码字。
可选地，CSI-reporting还可以指示终端对上报的参考信号上报其幅度信息和/或RSRP信息。参考信号的幅度信息和/或RSRP信息可以是接收参考信号两端口幅度上分别的幅度信息和/或RSRP量化结果，也可以是两端口幅度加权平均后的量化结果。量化的精度为某预定义范围内预定义的X比特。
可选地，CSI-reporting还可以指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式，终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式可以是周期性的上报、或者半静态的上报、或者是根据非周期上报。
可选地，若CSI-reporting指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式为周期性的，则在步骤2中配置的资源也是周期性的，且终端设备上报参考信号的周期与步骤2中资源 的周期相同都为T period，这样，可以保证终端设备测量一个周期的参考信号即可以上报一次测量结果。上报的时刻在周期中的偏置T R与资源配置的周期之间的关系需要满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000034
或者满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000035
如图5所示，示出了上报时刻T R的可选时间范围，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000036
表示终端设备需要在接收且处理完一次划分下的最后一个参考信号之后，且在一个周期结束之前上报测量结果。
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000037
表示终端设备需要在下一个周期的第一个参考信号接收且处理完之后上报测量结果。该设置能保证终端设备上报的一次测量结果，恰好是针对一次波束划分下的M个参考信号中的部分参考信号结果。
可选地，若CSI-reporting指令指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式为半静态性的，则在步骤2中配置的资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的。且终端设备上报参考信号的周期与步骤2中周期性资源的周期或者半静态配置的资源的周期都为T period。这样，可以保证终端设备测量一个周期的参考信号即可以上报一次测量结果。上报的时刻T R与资源配置的周期之间的关系需要满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000038
或者满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000039
如上述周期性上报一致。该设置能保证终端设备上报的一次测量结果，恰好是针对一次波束划分下的M个参考信号中的部分参考信号结果。
可选地，若CSI-reporting指令指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式为非周期性上报，则在步骤2中配置的资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的或者非周期的。网络设备需要发送H次参考信号上报指令，每发送一次参考信号上报指令，终端设备上报一次测量结果。
步骤4、网络设备在步骤2配置的资源上发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS。
在步骤4中，网络设备根据步骤2中确定的每次划分中每组波束和2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源的对应关系，对于一组波束，网络设备通过该组中的各个波束在该组波束对应2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS。
示例性地，第m个参考信号对应的一组波束中各波束的空间滤波参数(例如波束成形矢量)为{b i},i＝1,2,…,R，其中b i是该组波束中第i波束方向的空间滤波参数，例如可以为DFT基底中的一个矢量。网络设备在第m个参考信号的端口1上的空间滤波参数可以为∑b i。端口2的空间滤波参数为∑t ib i。若网络设备在步骤3中为终端设备配置了码字，则t i需要和各个参考信号配置的码字保持一致。若网络设备在步骤3中没有为终端设备配置码字，则t i可以依网络设备的实现，但原则上同一个参考信号对应的{t i}中任意两个元素均不相同，一种网络设备确定{t i}的方法为网络设备按照步骤3中方式一或方式二确定码字，然后令{t i}和码字保持一致。
举例来说，当网络设备在步骤3通过CSI-reporting配置一组波束方向数为R＝4时，根据某种指示或者默认规则，网络设备和终端设备按照方式一生成各参考信号对应的码字t i,i＝1，2，3，4，每个参考信号对应的码字均为{exp(j×0)，exp(j×π/2)，exp(j×π)，exp(j×3π/2)}。对于一个需要发送的2port参考信号，网络设备通过与该参考信号绑定的4个波束方向发送，若与其绑定的一组波束方向中4个波束方向的波束成形矢量分别为b 1，b 2，b 3，b 4，则在第一个port NZP-CSI-RS资源上，网络设备发送信号为(b 1+b 2+b 3+b 4)s 1，在第二个port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送信号为(t 1b 1+t 2b 2+t 3b 3+t 4b 4)×s 2。其中s 1为网络设备和终端设备约定的在该第一个端口上的参考信号值，s 2为网络设备和终端设备约定的在该第二个端口上的参考信号值。确定s 1和s 2的方式可以沿用目前NR中根据参考信号的RE时频位置确定NZP-CSI-RS基带信号的方式。从终端设备角度来看，该参考信号发送方式等效为，网络设备通过4个方向在第一个端口上均发送信号s 1，通过4个方向在第二个端口上分别发送信号t 1s 2，t 2s 2，t 3s 2，t 4s 2。
网络设备在步骤4中可以依次通过一次划分的M组波束在各自对应的2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS。这样，网络设备可以通过一次划分的M组波束，在各自对应的2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送完2-port NZP-CSI-RS之后，网络设备再通过另一次划分的M组波束，在各自对应的2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS，依次类推，网络设备可以通过H次划分的波束，在H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上发送H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS。
步骤5、终端设备对步骤4的2-port NZP-CSI-RS进行测量，并将测量结果上报给网络设备。
终端设备接收网络设备在步骤4发送的2-port NZP-CSI-RS，并对接收到的参考信号进行测量。终端设备接收到网络设备发送的2-port NZP-CSI-RS，测量得到2-port NZP-CSI-RS的相位或者幅度和相位，终端设备在2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源RS(h,m)两个端口上接收到的归一化NZP-CSI-RS的基带信号信号分别为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000040
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000041
其在[0,2π)间的相位分别为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000042
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000043
h的取值为1，2，……，H，m的取值为1，2，……，M。对于一次划分，h的取值固定。归一化指将接收的基带参考信号除以和网络设备约定的在相应时频位置的基带发送参考信号，即分别按s 1和s 2进行归一化。
对于一次划分下的M个参考信号，终端设备首先从M个参考信号中选取W个参考信号进行上报，W为网络设备在步骤3触发CSI-reporting指令时字段nrofReportedRS的值。一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000044
较大的W个参考信号，另一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000045
较大的W个参考信号，其中α 1和α 2为两端口的权系数，可以是预设的值，也可以由网络设备配置。
对于每个需要上报的参考信号，终端设备根据网络设备在步骤3中的配置选项上报测量结果：
针对选项一，终端设备上报：该参考信号资源索引，以及该索引对应的两端口参考相位差量化结果。相位差量化的方式可以默认为将相位差转换成[0,2π)间的相位差，即
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000046
然后再对其进行量化。
针对选项二，终端设备上报：该参考信号资源索引，以及与该参考信号关联的一个码字在与其关联所有码字中的索引。确定需要上报的码字索引的一种可能的实现方式为：首先根据步骤3中网络设备的CSI-reporting指令相关配置信息确定与该参考信号关联的码字{t r}，根据公式(1)确定需要上报的码字索引r h,m。
公式(1)的物理意义在于网络设备通过各个波束方向上发送的NZP-CSI-RS其2port间存在相位差，当网络设备和终端设备之间有效的波束方向(两者间能通信的波束方向)不同时，终端设备测量得到的参考信号两端口间的相位差也不同，使得公式(1)等式右边最小的码字即对应了网络设备和终端设备之间有效的波束方向，本申请实施例中可以对公式(1)的进行任何的变形，但是变形之后的公式的物理意义与公式(1)的物理意义类似。这样，一个码字对应一个波束，网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的相位索引确定对应的波束。
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000047
举例来说，若终端设备上报的一个NZP-CSI-RS关联的4个码字为{exp(j*0),exp(j*π/2),exp(j*π),exp(j*3π/2)}。网络设备通过与该参考信号绑定的4个波束方向发送NZP-CSI-RS，终端设备在该两端口NZP-CSI-RS资源位置上，收到4个波束方向发送的NZP-CSI-RS经过信道衰减后的叠加信号。假设第一组波束中存在一个波束(例如第一组的第三个波束)与终端设备和网络设备之间的有效径重叠，且该有效径在该波束方向上的等效信道增益为 h，则终端设备会在第一个端口上接收到
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000048
为hs 1或者接近hs 1，在第二个端口上会接收到
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000049
为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000050
或者接近
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000051
这是因为第一组波束除了第三个波束之外其他的波束不存在有效径，则终端设备接收到其他波束发送的NZP-CSI-RS为0或者接近0。终端设备根据接收到的信号以及公式(1)即可得到码字索引2(0-3中的索引)。
针对选项三，终端设备上报：该参考信号关联的一个码字在所有码字中的索引。确定需要上报的码字索引的一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备首先根据步骤3中网络设备的CSI-reporting指令相关配置信息确定与该参考信号关联的R个码字{t r}，然后根据公式(1)确定码字在该参考信号关联的R m个码字中的索引r h,m，假设上报的参考信号为M个参考信号中的第m个参考信号，然后将其加上(m-1)R作为该码字索引进行上报。举例来说，若网络设备给终端设备配置了2个参考信号，每个参考信号关联R＝4个码字，终端设备根据步骤3中网络设备的CSI-reporting指令相关配置信息确定与第1、2个参考信号关联的码字分别为，{exp(j×0)，exp(j×π/2)，exp(j×π)，exp(j×3π/2)}和{exp(j×2π/5)，exp(j×9π/10)，exp(j×14π/10)，exp(j×19π/10)，终端设备选择参考信号2关联的一个码字进行上报，且终端设备测量得到参考信号2上两端口的相位差为1.5π，则根据公式(1)，可确定需要上报的码字为exp(j×14π/10)，其相应的r h,m＝2(0-3中的索引)，将其加上(m-1)R，则终端设备最终上报的码字索引为2+1*4＝6。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报参考信号测量值的幅度信息或能量信息，则步骤5中，对于一个需要上报的参考信号，终端设备还需要上报
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000052
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000053
分别的幅度量化值
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000054
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000055
或
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000056
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000057
分别的能量量化值。
步骤6，网络设备根据终端设备上报的测量结果确定波束。
针对终端设备上报不同的选项，网络设备可以采用不同的方式确定波束。
在步骤5中，若终端设备上报的是选项1，网络设备在步骤6中，分两种情况确定有效波束：
情况一，若终端设备上报的测量结果中不包含参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，对于每一次划分，针对上报的一个NZP-CSI-RS，网络设备可以确定一组波束，并且网络设备将终端设备上报的两个端口的相位差量化值和在步骤4中该组波束中各波束上发送两端口参考信号的相位差进行比较，比较终端设备上报相位差量化值与网络设备在该组各方向上发送参考信号时的两端口相位差中哪个方向的相位差最接近，即可估计对应的该组方向中哪个方向为有效发送方向。终端设备每上报一个参考信号，网络设备即可估计出一个有效波束方向，根据不同划分下参考信号估计出的多个有效波束方向可能有重叠。
情况二，若终端设备上报的测量结果中包含了参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，通过以下三个步骤确定波束。
a)网络设备在多次划分中找隔离度最高的划分，隔离度最高表示若终端设备与网络设备之间存在多个有效的径，覆盖多个有效的径的多个波束属于网络设备一次划分下的不同组。对于终端设备上报的第h次划分下的上报结果，网络设备统计该次划分中参考信号两端口加权平均幅度值或能量值大于某预设门限的参考信号个数G h，即等效于该次划分下包含有效波束的组数。由于整个信道环境下有效波束的数量相同，对波束进行分组时将所有有效波束分在不同的组得到的测量效果最好。所以将G h值最大的一次或多次划分定义为隔离度最高的划分。
b)若a)中隔离度最高的划分包括多次划分。在每次划分下，针对每个NZP-CSI-RS可 以确定一组波束，并且网络设备将和在步骤4中该组波束中各波束上发送两端口参考信号的相位差进行比较，比较终端设备上报相位差量化值与网络设备在该组各方向上发送参考信号时的两端口相位差中哪个方向的相位差最接近，即可估计对应的该组方向中哪个方向为有效发送方向。同时还可得到终端设备上报相位差和网络设备在有效波束方向上实际相位差之间的误差，累计统计各次划分下误差和，从而可在隔离度最高的多次划分中找到一误差和最小的划分作为最佳划分，该次划分下对应的多个估计的有效波束方向可作为网络设备确定的有效波束方向。若a)中隔离度最高的划分有一次划分，则直接对该次划分下的有效波束方向进行估计。
c)网络设备估计有效的波束方向的增益。若终端设备还上报了各参考信号的幅度量化值或能量量化值，则可对b)中输出的各有效波束方向的增益进行估计，从而在这些有效波束方向中进行进一步选择。
在步骤5中，若终端设备上报的是选项2，网络设备在步骤6中，分两种情况确定有效波束：
情况一：若网络设备上报的测量结果中不包含参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，根据终端设备上报的参考信号资源索引，网络设备可以确定其关联的码字以及一组波束，根据终端设备上报的码字索引以及步骤4中码字和波束的对应关系，网络设备可以确定该组波束中的一个波束。故终端设备每上报一个参考信号的测量结果，网络设备即可估计出一个有效波束方向，其中，根据不同划分下参考信号估计出的多个有效波束方向可能有重叠。
情况二：若终端设备上报的测量结果中包含了参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，
网络设备在多次划分中找隔离度最高的划分，具体参见上述b)中找隔离度最高的划分。然后在隔离度最高的划分下参照情况一估计有效波束方向。若终端设备还上报了各参考信号的幅度量化值，则可对b)中输出的各有效波束方向的增益进行估计，从而在这些有效波束方向中进行进一步选择。
在步骤5中，若终端设备上报的是选项3，网络设备在步骤6中，分两种情况确定有效波束：
情况一：若网络设备上报的测量结果中不包含参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，根据终端设备上报的码字索引以及步骤4中码字和波束的对应关系，网络设备可以确定一个波束。故终端设备每上报一个码字索引，网络设备即可估计出一个有效波束方向，根据不同划分下参考信号估计出的多个有效波束方向可能有重叠。
情况二：若终端设备上报的测量结果中包含了参考信号的幅度信息或能量信息，网络设备在多次划分中找隔离度最高的划分，具体参见上述b)中找隔离度最高的划分。然后在隔离度最高的划分下参照情况一估计有效波束方向。若终端设备还上报了各参考信号的幅度量化值和/或能量量化值，则可对b)中输出的各有效波束方向的增益进行估计，从而在这些有效波束方向中进行进一步选择。
上述方法实施例描述的是第二设备向第一设备配置资源以及发送第一配置信息，第一设备根据配置的资源以及第一配置信息对第二设备发送的参考信号进行测量，并将测量结果上报给第二设备，第二设备根据测量结果确定有效的波束。下面结合图6的方法300描述本申请实施例中的用于波束训练的方法，方法300中第二设备向第一设备配置资源以及发送第二配置信息，根据多次波束划分的测量结果，第一设备可以直接确定有效的波束方 向和/或有效波束方向的信道增益，然后对其进行上报。换句话说，在S300中，第二设备将波束训练的所有信息都直接向第一设备指示，由第一设备自行对各波束方向的增益进行估计，最后直接上报其估计的有效波束方向(以及相应增益)，而不必对针对每次划分对各参考信号进行逐一的测量上报。
方法300包括：
S301，同S201。
S302，同S202。
S303，第二设备向第一设备发送第二配置信息，第二配置信息配置L个空间滤波参数索引和L个码字，M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联L个码字中的R m个码字，第m个参考信号还关联L个空间滤波参数索引中的R m个空间滤波参数索引，M是大于1的正整数，R m是正整数。
可选地，L个空间滤波参数索引与L个码字一一对应，L个码字与L个波束一一对应，换句话说，L个空间滤波参数索引、L个码字、L个波束三者中任意两者可以一一对应。
可选地，第二配置信息中配置L个码字、以及L个码字和M个参考信号的关系的方式，可以参考S203中第一配置信息中配置码字的方式。
可选地，L个空间滤波参数可以是L个波束赋形参数，例如L个DFT基底中的矢量。空间滤波参数索引即对应了波束成形矢量索引，例如DFT矢量索引。
可选地，一个空间滤波参数与S301中的一个波束对应。
可选地，第二配置信息中显式地指示M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的空间滤波参数索引。即第二配置信息包括M个第二字段，M个第二字段分别为M个参考信号配置相关联的空间滤波参数索引。
可选地，第二配置信息配置一个随机种子，终端设备可以采用随机种子确定M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的空间滤波参数索引。第一设备基于以下假设确定M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的空间滤波参数索引：1)第二设备在S301中对波束分组是通过预定义的随机分组函数以及一随机种子对波束索引分组实现的，换句话说，第二设备在对波束进行分组划分中，将随机种子输入随机分组函数得到分组波束的索引，第二设备根据分组波束的索引对波束进行划分；2)第二设备在S301中使用的随机种子和向第一设备发送的第二配置信息携带的随机种子一致；3)第一设备将随机种子输入与步骤1)相同的预定义随机分组函数得到分组波束的索引，分组波束的索引即为M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数索引。
需要说明的是，S303是可选步骤，第二设备可以不向第一设备发送第二配置信息，第一设备可以根据预设的配置和测量得到的参考信号的测量结果进行上报。
可以理解的是，S302与S303可以是在同一个消息中发送也可以是在不同的消息中发送，本申请实施例不予限制。
S304，同S204。
可选地，第一设备根据如下假设对第m个参考信号进行测量：
两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据∑b i×s 1确定的；和/或，
两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据∑t ib i×s 2确定的，t i为第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字i＝1，2，……，R m；
可选地，对于第m个参考信号，第一设备确定第二设备通过该组波束的各个波束方向在第一个端口上都发送s 1，通过该组波束的各个方向在第二个端口上分别发送t i×s 2。
可选地，上述S301-304重复执行H次，即第二设备将所有波束进行H次划分，总共发送H*M个参考信号。每次划分下M个参考信号都对应L个码字，每次划分下M个参考信号都对应L空间滤波参数。
S305，第一设备对S304中第二设备发送的M个参考信号进行测量并确定V个有效波束及其增益。
可选地，第一设备综合H次波束划分的结果，可以从H次波束划分中确定波束隔离度较高的波束划分，然后根据波束隔离度较高的划分更准确地对有效波束以及有效波束增益进行估计，从而上报V个有效波束对应的空间滤波参数索引。
S306，第一设备向第二设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息指示L个空间滤波参数索引中的V个空间滤波参数索引，V是小于等于L的正整数。
可选地，V个空间滤波参数索引可以是S305中第一设备估计结果中V个增益较大的波束的索引。
可选地，方法300还包括：第一设备向第二设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息指示V个空间滤波参数对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个。其中，第二幅度信息包括V个空间滤波参数中各个空间滤波参数对应的幅度信息，即V个波束对应的幅度信息。第二能量信息包括V个空间滤波参数中各个空间滤波参数对于的能力信息，即V个波束对应的能量信息。
S307，第二设备根据V个空间滤波参数确定有效波束。
其中，一个空间滤波参数索引对应一个波束，则第一设备共可以确定V个有效波束。
可选地，若第一设备还上报了V个空间滤波参数索引对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个，第二设备还可以根据V个空间滤波参数索引对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个对V个有效波束进行进一步挑选。
在上述方法300中，除了能实现方法200中节约波束训练参考信号资源开销，提升波束训练的速度的目的之外，方法S300还可以节省第一设备的上报开销。在方法200中，第一设备针对每次波束划分都需要上报一次第二指示信息，当第二设备对各波束进行多次划分时，第二设备根据第一设备上报的多个指示信息(对应多次波束划分)综合估计有效波束。而在S300中，第二设备将波束分组的信息，即各个参考信号对应的空间滤波参数索引指示给第一设备，第一设备可以在本地综合多次波束划分的测量结果对有效波束直接进行估计从而上报，所以针对多次波束分组划分，第一设备只需要上报一次指示信息。
下面描述具体描述方法300中的确定波束的过程。下面的以对波束进行均匀划分，参考信号为CSI-RS，第一设备为终端设备，第二设备为网络设备为例描述为例，但本申请实施例不限于此。
步骤1，划分波束。
其中步骤1的划分波束参见方法200中的举例的步骤1。
步骤2，配置资源。
网络设备为每次划分中的每组波束配置一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，换句话说，一次波束划分中的一组波束对应一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源。如网络设备可以针对一次划 分配置M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，H次划分配置H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源。网络设备配置的H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的或者非周期的。每个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源和一次划分下的一组波束相绑定。
对于周期性资源和半静态的资源，网络设备需要配置一个周期内至少有H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，且这H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源需要在不同的符号内，这样，网络设备在H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上通过H*M组波束发送参考信号时，能够在时间上错开。如图7所示，RS(h,1)表示一个周期T period内第h次划分中的第一个参考信号资源，RS(h,M)表示一个周期T period内第h次划分中的第M个参考信号资源，RS(h+1,M+1)表示一个周期T period内第h+1次划分中的第1个参考信号资源，RS(H,M*H)表示一个周期T period内第H次划分中的第M个参考信号资源，RS(H+1,1)表示第H+1次划分中的第一个参考信号资源，第H+1次划分为另一个周期的第一次参考信号的划分。
此外，如网络设备配置的周期性资源的周期为T period，该周期内第H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源(图8中的RS(H,M*H))结束时刻相对周期的偏移(offset)为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000058
第1个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源结束时刻相对周期的偏移(offset)为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000059
则需要保证
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000060
T proc为终端设备接收到一个周期的参考信号后对一个周期的参考信号的处理时间，T proc可以是终端设备和网络设备通过信令交换确定的。
对于非周期的资源，网络设备需要动态配置H*M个NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集合中的2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源需要在不同的符号内，这样，网络设备在2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源上通过M组波束发送参考信号时，能够在时间上错开。
步骤3、测量配置。
网络设备向终端设备发送CSI-reporting指令，CSI-reporting指令包括用于指示在步骤2中配置的资源中哪些资源上测量参考信号的信息，同时CSI-reporting指令用于指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果，CSI-reporting指令中的reportQuantity字段BeamGroupingConfig的取值为sequence(S，R，Beamrouping)，字段BeamGroupingConfig为本申请实施例针对本波束训练方案新增字段，其中，R为每组波束方向数量，S为网络设备支持的波束的总数量，Beamrouping用于指示H次波束划分的划分结果。一种可能的实现方式为Beamrouping是一个长度为HS的序列，该序列中所有元素的值为0～S-1间的整数。该序列中第((h-1)S+r+(m-1)R)个数的值表示第h次划分下第m组中第r个方向的方向索引，h＝1，…,H；r＝1,…,R；m＝1,…,M。换句话说该长度为HS的序列即可指示网络设备的H次波束划分结果。另一种可能的实现方式为Beamrouping为一随机种子值，网络设备和终端设备基于该随机种子和同样的随机数生成函数将序列{0,1，…,S-1}打乱H次，并将这H个序列顺序合并成一个长度为HS的伪随机序列，该伪随机序列也可以指示网络设备的H次波束划分结果，若采用该方法，网络设备步骤1中的波束划分也依据该伪随机序列进行划分。可选地，随机数生成函数为网络设备提前配置给终端设备的。参考信号上报指令中的nrofReportedBeam字段设置为V。V可以是网络设备估计的网络设备与终端设备之间的有效波束的数量。
网络设备可以通过方法200步骤3的方式一或方式二指示每个参考信号对应的R个码字。可选地，网络设备可以通过相关信令向终端设备指示网络设备采用的是方式一还是方式二，也可以不进行指示，网络设备和终端设备根据某种预定义的规则默认其中的某一种方式。CSI-reporting还可以指示终端设备上报指示信息的方式。终端设备上报指示信息的 方式可以是周期性的上报或者半静态的上报或者是非周期上报。
若CSI-reporting指示终端设备上报指示信息的方式为周期性的，则在步骤2中配置的资源也是周期性的，且终端设备上报指示信息的周期与步骤2中资源的周期相同都为T period，这样，可以保证终端设备测量一个周期的参考信号即可以上报一次指示信息。上报的时刻T R与资源配置的周期之间的关系需要满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000061
或者
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000062
如图8所示，示出了上报时刻上报T R的可选时间范围，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000063
表示终端设备需要在接收且处理完一次划分下的最后一个参考信号之后，且在一个周期结束前上报测量结果，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000064
表示终端设备需要在下一个周期的第一个参考信号接收之前上报测量结果。
若CSI-reporting指令指示终端设备上报指示信息的方式为半静态性的，则在步骤2中配置的资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的，且终端设备上报指示信息的周期与步骤2中资源的周期相同，即周期为T period。这样，可以保证终端设备测量一个周期的参考信号即可以上报一次指示信息。上报的时刻T R与资源配置的周期之间的关系需要满足或者满足
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000065
或者
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000066
若CSI-reporting指令指示终端设备上报指示信息的方式为非周期上报，则在步骤2中配置的资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的或者非周期的。网络设备需要发送一上报指令，终端设备上报一次指示信息。
步骤4，网络设备在步骤2配置的资源上发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS。
其中步骤4的网络设备发送2-port NZP-CSI-RS参见方法200中的举例的步骤4。
步骤5、终端设备对步骤4的2-port NZP-CSI-RS进行测量，根据测量得到两端口参考信号幅度相位，并根据方法200步骤5的方法对接收参考信号进行归一化。然后估计各波束方向的增益。
其中，终端设备估计各波束方向的增益的方法可以参考方法200中举例的步骤6中针对选项一的情况二中的方法。
步骤6，终端设备向网络设备上报参考信号测量结果，测量结果包含V个波束方向的索引。一种选择V个波束方向的方法是，根据步骤5中的估计结果选取V个增益最大的波束方向进行上报。
可选地，若网络设备在步骤3中指示终端设备上报波束的幅度信息或者能量信息，则终端设备对相应有效波束的幅度或能量进行量化后进行上报。能量信息可以包括RSRP信息。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中为了方便理解，方法200和方法300中第二设备向第一设备发送的配置信息可以包括一个或多个参数，若第二设备向第一设备发送多个参数，则可以通过一个配置信息发送或者多个不同的配置信息发送，本申请实施例不予限制。
方法200和方法300中的配置信息包括第一设备需要上报W个的参考信号的测量结果，则第一设备上报的V个码字即为W个码字，V＝W。这种情况下，第一设备上报的参考信号测量结果的数量等于第二设备配置的上报码字数量。也就是说，在上述方案中，基于毫米波信道稀疏性的前提是：一组波束中至多只有一个有效的波束，这种前提下第一设备对于一个参考信号只上报一个码字即可，即上报的参考信号数等于上报码字数，W＝V。当发送的参考信号是宽带参考信号时，即使一组波束内存在不止一个有效波束，第一设备能够 在时延域对多个时延不同的有效波束进行区分，并针对一个参考信号上报多个码字，即V>W，从而增强对各个有效波束的分辨能力和估计能力。下面结合图9的方法400的实施例描述本申请的波束训练的方法。
S401，同S201。
S402，第二设备为每组波束配置一个参考信号资源集合，即配置M个参考信号资源集合。
在S402中，第二设备可以配置M个参考信号资源集合中每个参考信号资源集合索引、每个参考信号资源集合中各个参考信号资源的时频资源位置、每个参考信号资源集合中包括的参考信号资源的索引、以及每个参考信号资源集合中包括的参考信号资源占的端口数量。
可选地，M个参考信号资源集合中每个参考信号资源集合在不同子载波占多个两端口子带参考信号资源，多个两端口子带参考信号资源的频率间隔相同。M个参考信号资源集合对应了M个宽带两端口参考信号。一个参考信号资源集合以及其对应的一个宽带参考信号可以由一个参考信号资源集合索引标识。一个子带参考信号资源以及其对应的一个子带参考信号可以由一个子带参考信号资源索引标识。M个宽带参考信号中每个宽带参考信号与S401中的一组波束相关联，换句话说，一个宽带参考信号，一个参考信号资源集合，一个参考信号资源集合索引，一组波束这四者任意两者间具有一一对应的关联关系。方法400中出现的参考信号除非特别指示都默认为宽带参考信号。
下文中参考信号资源集合索引也可称为宽带参考信号的索引。方法400中的宽带参考信号可以简称为参考信号，宽带参考信号的索引可以简称“参考信号的索引”，参考信号的索引用于指示一个宽带参考信号序列以及该参考信号序列对应的时频资源位置。
示例性地，如图10所示，示出三组波束对应的三个参考信号资源集合，每组波束对应一个参考信号资源集合中包含三个两端口子带资源，且其中任何两个频域相邻的两端口子带资源的频域间隔都相同。
可选地，上述M个参考信号中，各参考信号对应的波束数量均大于2，这样，终端设备可以对一个参考信号测量确定多个波束的测量结果，从而可以降低资源开销。
可选地，在S402中，针对S401的多次波束分组划分第二设备可以配置周期性的、半静态的或非周期的参考信号资源集合。
可选地，第二设备可以通过广播或者组播或者单播的方式向第一设备配置分组后的波束所占的资源。
S403，第二设备向第一设备发送用于波束训练的第三配置信息，第三配置信息用于配置L个码字。
其中，L个码字和M个参考信号具有关联关系。
可选地，M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联L个码字中的至少一个码字。M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联L个码字中的R m个码字。
可选地，M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联L个码字中的至少两个码字，例如，存在两个参考信号关联的码字不相等的情况下，一个参考信号关联L个码字中的两个码子，另一个参考信号关联L个码字中的一个码字。又例如，在每个参考信号关联的码字相等的情况下，每个参考信号都关联L个码字中的两个码字或者两个以上的码字。
可选地，第二设备通过第三配置信息配置的L个码字与S401中的L个波束一一对应，或者L个码字与L个空间滤波参数一一对应。所以M个参考信号中的第m个参考信号还关联L个空间滤波参数中的R m个空间滤波参数(波束)，且第m个参考信号关联的一个码字与第m个参考信号关联的一组波束中的一个波束相关联。第一设备接收用于配置码字的第三配置信息，可以通过上报码字对有效波束进行指示。
L个码字的配置方法以及L个码字和M个参考信号的关联关系可分为三种情况。三种情况和S203中的情况一、二和三相同。
第三配置信息还可以配置第一设备发送的指示信息所指示的码字或码字索引数量为V。
针对不同情况下的码字配置方法，第三配置信息配置第一设备以不同的选项上报第一指示信息。
不同上报选项和S203中的上报选项一、二相同。
可选地，选项一、二中第三配置信息还可以配置第一设备上报V个码字的幅度信息或能量信息中的至少一个。
S404，同S204。
S405，第一设备对S404中第二设备发送的参考信号进行测量，并向第二设备发送第五指示信息。
可选地，第一设备对接收参考信号按照第二设备和第一设备约定的信号进行归一化处理。具体步骤同S205中的归一化方法。
针对S403中选项一，第一设备上报的第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字或码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字，所述W个参考信号为所述M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000067
示例性地，第一设备首先从M个参考信号中选取W个参考信号作为需要上报的参考信号，一种选取W个参考信号的方法为：选取M个参考信号中W个能量较大或者幅度较大的参考信号。然后根据W个参考信号两端口上的测量结果，对每个参考信号确定v w个码字。
可选地，一种确定码字的方法是方法1，具体包括两个步骤：1)对于一个需要上报的参考信号，第一设备将该2端口宽带参考信号在每个端口上分别按照频域顺序进行排序变成两个频域信号序列，然后将两个序列利用离散傅里叶变换或离散傅里叶逆变换变换到时域，得到两端口时域信号序列。2)根据该两端口时域序列中选取v w个索引，确定该v w个索引的方法可以为将第一端口时域信号的幅度(或者能量)和第二端口时域信号的幅度(或者能量)加权平均得到第三序列，然后选取第三序列元素值最大的v w个位置为v w个索引。3)计算两端口时域信号在v w个位置上的相位差，然后选取该参考信号关联的R m个码字中分别和v w个相位差差距最小的v w个码字。v w个码字的索引的确定方法和S205选项一相同。
可选地，方法1下第一设备对于上报的W个参考信号中的每个可以上报v w个位置索引信息。
另一种确定码字的方法是方法2，具体步骤为，1)和第一方法的1)相同；2)对于两端口时域序列的每一个位置索引，都可以根据两个端口的相位差按照方法1中的3)确定一个码字，该码字实际对应了一个波束，两端口时域序列在该位置索引上的能量(例如 两端口序列在该位置上的加权平均能量)即为该码字对应波束方向上收集到能量的一部分，遍历两端口时域序列的每个位置索引，即可对各码字对应的各个波束方向上收集到的能量进行估计，然后将能量增益最大的v w个波束对应的v w个码字确定为需要上报的码字。v w个码字的索引的确定方法和S205选项一相同。
针对S403中选项二，第一设备上报的第五指示信息包括上报V个码字或V个码字索引。第一设备确定V个码字的过程和上述选项一相同。确定V个码字索引的方法和S205中选项二相同。
可选地，第一设备上报第六指示信息，第六指示信息指示V个码字的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个。第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个是量化后的结果，具体的量化方式和精度可以是预定义的也可以是第二设备配置的。
可选地，S403中的第三配置信息可以为方法200中的第一配置信息，S405中的第五指示信息可以为方法200中的第一指示信息。
S406，同S206。
在上述方法400中，将该波束训练方法扩展到宽带参考信号场景中，在一组波束可能包括一个或多个有效的波束的情况下，通过将宽带参考信号变换到时延域从而对具备不同时延的多个有效波束进行区分，提高有效波束检测和估计能力。
下面描述具体描述方法400中的确定波束的过程。下面以对波束进行均匀划分、参考信号为NZP-CSI-RS，第一设备为终端设备，第二设备为网络设备为例描述，但本申请实施例不限于此。
步骤1，划分波束。
同方法200下的步骤1相同。
步骤2，配置资源。
网络设备为每次划分中的每组波束配置多个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，换句话说，一次波束划分中的一组波束对应多个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，多个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源的时域相同且在频域的间隔也相同，换句话说，一组波束对应的多个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源为同一时间的等子载波间隔的资源。该多个2-portNZP-CSI-RS资源构成一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，网络设备可在每个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合上发送多个子带参考信号，构成一个宽带参考信号，下文中除特别指出，参考信号为宽带参考信号的缩写。如一组波束对应3个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，该3个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源构成一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，3个2-portNZP-CSI-RS资源上可以发送3个两端口子带参考信号，构成一个宽带参考信号。网络设备可以针对一次划分配置3*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，H次划分配置3*H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源。网络设备配置的3*H*M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源可以是周期性的或者半静态的或者非周期的。
网络设备可以用资源索引来指示各个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，若网络设备为多组波束共配置了U个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源，则可以用1，…u…，U，u表示U个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源的索引，当然也可以用0,1，…u…，U-1表示U个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源的索引。
网络设备可以用资源集合索引来指示各个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，若网络设备为多组波束共配置了M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合，则可以用1，…，m，…，M，m 表示M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合的索引，当然也可以用0,1，……，M-1表示M个2-port NZP-CSI-RS资源集合的索引。
对于周期性或者半静态或者非周期的资源可以参考方法200下的步骤2的描述。
步骤3，测量配置。
网络设备向终端设备发送CSI-reporting指令，CSI-reporting指令包含了用于指示终端设备在步骤2中配置的哪些资源上测量的参考信号的信息。CSI-reporting指令中的nrofBeamEachRS字段的取值为R，字段nrofBeamEachRS为本申请实施例针对本波束训练方案新增字段，R为步骤1中每组波束方向数量。网络设备可以通过两种方式指示每个参考信号对应的至少一个码字，对每个参考信号配置至少一个码字的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤3中的方式一或方式二。
可选地，网络设备可以通过相关信令向终端设备指示网络设备采用的配置码字是方式一还是方式二，也可以不进行指示，网络设备和终端设备根据某种预定义的规则默认按照方式一和方式二中的某一种方式。
参考信号上报指令中的nrofReportedRS字段设置为W，即指示终端需要上报M个参考信号中的W个参考信号的测量结果。
可选地，网络设备可以在CSI-reporting指令中配置终端设备对于每个参考信号上报的具体内容为：
选项一，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字，或者利用方式二配置码字，或者不配置码字时，网络设备可以配置终端设备上报：该参考信号对应的资源集合索引，以及该参考信号资源集合下各两端口资源上测量得到的两个端口的相位量化值。相位量化的方式可以默认为将相位转换成[0,2π)间的相位，然后对其进行Xbit的均匀量化。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：该参考信号资源集合下各两端口资源上测量得到的两端口的幅度量化值。
选项二，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字，或者利用方式二配置码字时，网络设备可以通过CSI-reporting指令配置字段nrofDelayTaps为E。此选项下，对于需要上报的一个参考信号，终端设备需要对接收到的该组2port参考信号分别按照频域顺序进行排序变成两个频域信号序列，然后将两个序列利用离散傅里叶变化变换到时域，得到两端口时域信号序列。终端设备需要上报：该参考信号对应的资源集合索引以及两端口时域信号在E个位置索引上的相位差量化值。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：两端口时域信号的E个位置索引。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：两端口时域信号在这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值。
选项三，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字，或者利用方式二配置码字时，网络设备可以通过CSI-reporting指令配置字段nrofDelayTaps为E。此选项下终端设备需要对接收到的该组2port参考信号分别按照频域顺序进行排序变成两个频域信号序列，然后将两个序列利用离散傅里叶变化变换到时域，得到两端口时域信号序列。终端设备需要上报：与该参考信号对应的参考信号资源集合索引以及两端口时域信号在E个位置索引上对应的码字索引。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：两端口时域信号的E个位置索引。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：两端口时域信号在这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值。
选项四，当上述CSI-reporting中利用方式一配置码字，或者利用方式二配置码字时，网络设备可以通过CSI-reporting指令配置字段nrofBeams为K。此选项下，网络设备配置终端设备上报：该参考信号对应的参考信号资源集合索引以及与该参考信号对应的K个码字索引。
可选地，网络设备指示终端设备上报的参考信号的测量结果还可以包括：该K个码字对应的能量。
可选地，选项三和选项四中通过参考信号资源集合以及码字索引共同指示的方式也可以通过码字索引指示，此时网络设备可以配置终端设备不上报参考信号资源集合索引，而上报码字索引。此时相应选项适用于上述CSI-reporting中利用方式二配置每个参考信号关联的至少一个码字。
CSI-reporting还可以指示终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式，终端设备上报参考信号的测量结果的方式可以是周期性的上报或者半静态的上报或者非周期上报。具体细节可参考方法200中举例步骤3。
步骤4，同方法200中步骤4。
步骤5，终端设备对步骤4发送的参考信号进行测量，并将测量结果上报给网络设备。
对于第h次划分下的M个参考信号，终端设备对其进行测量，得到各个参考信号上的测量结果为
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000068
其中
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000069
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000070
分别是第h次划分下第m个波束组的一个宽带参考信号包括的第f个子带参考信号的第一个端口和第二个端口得到的归一化结果，均为复数。f的取值为1，……，F，F为一个宽带参考信号包含的两端口子带参考信号数量。
对于一次划分，终端设备首先从接收到的所有的M个参考信号中选取W个参考信号作为需要上报的参考信号组，一种可能的实现方式是选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000071
最大的W个参考信号；另一种可能的实现方式是选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000072
最大的W个参考信号。加权平均系数α 1和α 2由网络设备提前配置或默认为缺省值。
对于需要上报的一个参考信号，不妨设该参考信号对应了第h次划分下的第m组波束，其中，h的取值为1，……，H，m的取值为1，……，M。终端设备根据网络设备在步骤3中的配置选项上报该参考信号的测量结果：
针对步骤3中的选项一，终端设备上报该参考信号对应的参考资源集合索引，同时对该参考信号下的每一个2-port NZP-CSI-RS上报其对应的
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000073
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000074
表示
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000075
相位在[0,2π)间的量化值，
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000076
表示
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000077
相位在[0,2π)间的量化值。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报参考信号测量值的幅度信息，则终端设备还需要上报
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000078
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000079
的幅度量化值
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000080
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000081
针对步骤3中的选项二，终端设备将频域序列
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000082
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000083
分别进行离 散傅里叶变化得到时域序列
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000084
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000085
然后选取E个位置索引。一种可能的选取该E个位置索引的方法可以为，从1到F中选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000086
最大的E个索引f，另一种可能的方法为，从1到F中选取
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000087
最大的E个索引f。此时终端设备上报：该参考信号对应的资源集合索引以及
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000088
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000089
在这E个位置索引上的相位差量化值。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报E个位置索引，则终端设备还需要上报上述选取出来的E个位置索引。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报参考信号测量值的幅度信息，则终端设备还需要上报
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000090
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000091
在上述这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值。
针对步骤3中的选项三，与选项二类似，通过离散傅里叶变化得到时域序列并确定E个位置索引后，此时终端设备上报：该参考信号对应的资源集合索引、
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000092
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000093
在这E个位置索引上对应的码字索引。对应码字可以根据两个序列在这E个位置索引上的相位差以及与该参考信号关联的至少一个码字确定。根据相位差确定码字和码字索引的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤5中的选项二。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报E个位置索引，则终端设备还需要上报上述选取出来的E个位置索引。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报参考信号测量值的幅度信息，则终端设备还需要上报
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000094
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000095
在上述这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值。
针对步骤3中的选项四，终端设备需要上报：该参考信号对应的资源集合索引，以及与该个参考信号绑定的至少一个码字中的K个码字的索引。与该参考信号共关联的共有R个码字，R为与该参考信号绑定的一组波束的波束数量。与选项二类似，通过离散傅里叶变化得到时域序列
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000096
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000097
对于每一个位置索引f，参考S405选项三，可以根据
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000098
和
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000099
间的相位差以及与该参考信号关联的至少一个码字确定一个码字，记该码字在该参考信号的关联的至少一个码字中的索引为r(f)，然后根据以下算法选择需要上报的K个码字。
初始化：P初始化为长度为R的全零向量
输入：
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000100
和{r(f)} f＝1 to F
For f＝1 to F
Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-000101
End
输出：将P个元素中最大的K个位置索引输出作为需要上报的K个码字的索引。
其中α 1和α 2分别为两个端口的能量权重值，可默认设置也可以由网络设备配置。
可选地，若步骤3中网络设备配置了终端设备需要上报相应码字的能量信息，则终端设备还需要上报向量P在这K个索引上的元素值。
可选地，针对选项三和选项四，若网络设备配置终端设备不上报参考信号资源集合索引，而上报码字索引，终端设备可以不上报参考信号资源集合索引，而上报码字索引，确定码字的过程和选项三和选项四相同，确定码字索引的过程参考方法200中步骤5选项三。
步骤6，网络设备可以确定一个或多个波束，该一个或多个波束中可以存在两个或两个以上的波束属于步骤1划分的同一组波束。
针对步骤5中选项一，终端设备上报了W个参考信号资源集合索引，以及各参考信号 资源集合下对应的各个两端口参考信号的相位量化值。则网络设备根据上报的各参考信号两端口间的相位差确定其对应的码字，从而进一步确定有效波束方向。确定有效波束方向的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤6中上报的选项一对应的情况一。若终端设备还上报了各个两端口参考信号的幅度量化值，对于一个参考信号，网络设备可以参考步骤5中选项四对各个波束方向的增益进行估计，对每个参考信号重复执行该方法可获得所有波束方向的增益估计，然后进一步从中选取发送波束。
针对步骤3中选项二，终端设备上报了W个参考信号资源集合索引以及对应的两端口时域信号在E个位置索引上的相位差量化值。则网络设备根据上报的各参考信号两端口间的相位差确定其对应的码字，从而进一步确定有效波束方向。确定有效波束方向的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤6中选项一的情况一。若终端设备还上报了各个两端口时域信号在这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值，对于一个参考信号，网络设备可以参考步骤5中选项四对各个波束方向的增益进行估计，对每个参考信号重复执行该方法可获得所有波束方向的增益估计，然后进一步从中选取发送波束。
针对步骤3中选项三，终端设备上报了W个参考信号资源集合索引以及对应的两端口时域信号在E个位置索引上的码字索引，则网络设备可以根据码字确定有效波束方向。确定有效波束方向的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤6中选项二的情况一。若终端设备还上报了各个两端口时域信号在这E个位置索引上的幅度量化值，对于一个参考信号，网络设备可以参考步骤5中选项四对各个波束方向的增益进行估计，对每个参考信号重复执行该方法可获得所有波束方向的增益估计，然后进一步从中选取发送波束。
针对步骤3中选项四，终端设备上报了W个参考信号资源集合索引，以及对应的每个参考信号下的K个码字索引，则网络设备可以根据码字确定有效波束方向。确定有效波束方向的方法可以参考方法200举例步骤6中选项二的情况一。若终端设备还上报了每个码字对应的能量信息，则网络设备可以得到各个波束方向的增益估计，然后进一步从中选取发送波束。
方法400相比于方法200，通过引入额外的时延域信息，能对一组波束中的多个波束进行区分，从而能在节省波束训练时间的前提下提升波束训练的准确率。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，某个参数的索引可以从0开始或者也可以从1开始，例如，R m个码字的索引分别为0，1，2，……，R m-1，也可以为1，2，……，R m。M个参考信号的索引分别为0,1,2……M-1，也可以为1,2……M。本申请实施例不予限制。
也需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字可以理解为：M个参考信号中一个参考信号关联的码字数量是一个或者多个。本申请实施例中，M个参考次信号中存在至少一个参考信号关联L个码字中的至少两个码字可以理解为：M个参考信号中存在一个或多个参考信号关联的码字数量是两个或两个以上，也可以存在参考信号关联的码字数量可以是一个。
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案，也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合，这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。
可以理解的是，上述各个方法实施例中由第一设备或者终端设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于第一设备或终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，上述各个方法实施例中由第二设备或者网络设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于第二设备或者网络设 备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。
上文描述了本申请提供的方法实施例，下文将描述本申请提供的装置实施例。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
上文主要从设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了描述。可以理解的是，各个设备，例如第一设备或者第二设备或者终端设备或者网络设备，为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的保护范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例，对第一设备或者第二设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有其它可行的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。
图11为本申请实施例提供的装置500的示意性框图。该装置500包括发送单元510和接收单元520。发送单元510可以向外部发送信号，接收单元510可以接收外部的信号。发送单元510和接收单元520还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
该装置500可以用于执行上文方法实施例中第一设备或者第二设备所执行的动作，这时，该装置500可以称为第一设备或者第二设备，发送单元510用于执行上文方法实施例中第一设备或者第二设备侧的发送相关的操作，接收单元520用于执行上文方法实施例中第一设备或者第二设备侧的接收相关的操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，装置500用于实现上文方法实施例中由第一设备执行的操作。示例性地，接收单元520用于接收用于波束训练的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字，M和L是正整数。发送单元510用于发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示该L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，该第一指示信息是该装置500根据该M个参考信号的测量确定的。
在一种可能的实现方式中，装置500用于实现上文方法实施例中由第一设备执行的操作。示例性地，接收单元520用于接收用于波束训练的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字和该L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；发送单元510用于发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示该L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V为小于或等于L的正整数，该第二指示信息是根据该装置500对该M个参考信号的测量、该L个码字和该L个空间滤波参数确定的。
在一种可能的实现方式中，装置500用于实现上文方法实施例中由第二设备执行的操作。示例性地，发送单元510用于发送用于波束训练的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息配 置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字，M和L是正整数；接收单元520用于接收第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示该L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数。
在一种能的实现方式中，装置500用于实现上文方法实施例中由第二设备执行的操作。示例性地，发送单元510用于发送用于波束训练的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，该M个参考信号每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字和该L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；接收单元520用于接收第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示该L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V是小于或等于L的正整数。
上述各个方案的装置500具有实现上述方法中第一设备或第二设备执行的相应步骤的功能；功能可以通过硬件或软件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块；例如发送单元可以由通信接口替代，接收单元可以由通信接口替代，其它单元，如确定单元等可以由处理器替代，分别执行各个方法实施例中的收发操作以及相关的处理操作。在本申请实施例中，一个装置的通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性的，通信接口可以是发射机、接收机、收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口，本申请实施例不做限制。
在具体实现过程中，处理器可用于进行，例如但不限于，基带相关处理，通信接口可用于进行，例如但不限于，信息交互。上述器件可以分别设置在彼此独立的芯片上，也可以至少部分的或者全部的设置在同一块芯片上。例如，处理器可以进一步划分为模拟基带处理器和数字基带处理器，其中模拟基带处理器可以与通信接口集成在同一块芯片上，数字基带处理器可以设置在独立的芯片上。随着集成电路技术的不断发展，可以在同一块芯片上集成的器件越来越多，例如，数字基带处理器可以与多种应用处理器(例如但不限于图形处理器，多媒体处理器等)集成在同一块芯片之上。这样的芯片可以称为系统芯片(system on chip，SOC)。将各个器件独立设置在不同的芯片上，还是整合设置在一个或者多个芯片上，往往取决于产品设计的具体需要。本申请实施例对上述器件的具体实现形式不做限定。
可以理解的是，对于前述实施例中所涉及的处理器可以通过具有处理器和通信接口的硬件平台执行程序指令来分别实现其在本申请前述实施例中任一设计中涉及的功能，基于此，如图12所示，本申请实施例提供了装置600的示意性框图，装置600包括：处理器610、通信接口620和存储器630。其中，处理器610、通信接口620和存储器630耦合以互相通信，该存储器630用于存储指令，该处理器610用于执行该存储器630存储的指令，以控制该通信接口620发送信号和/或接收信号。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。
其中，在一种可能的实现方式中，若该装置600为第一设备，处理器610用于控制通信接口620接收用于波束训练的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字，M和L是正整数；处理器610还用于控制通信接口620发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示该L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，该第一指示信息是装置600根据 该M个参考信号的测量确定的。通信接口620用于根据处理器610的控制接收第一配置信息和发送第一指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若该装置600为第一设备，处理器610用于控制通信接口620接收用于波束训练的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字和该L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；处理器610还用于控制通信接口620发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示该L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V为小于或等于L的正整数，该第二指示信息是根据该装置600对该M个参考信号的测量、该L个码字和该L个空间滤波参数确定的。通信接口620用于根据处理器610的控制接收第二配置信息和发送第二指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若该装置600为第二设备，处理器610用于控制通信接口620发送用于波束训练的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，该M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字，M和L是正整数。处理器610还用于控制通信接口620接收第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示该L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，该第一指示信息为第一设备该M个参考信号的测量确定的。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若该装置600为第二设备，处理器610用于控制通信接口620发送用于波束训练的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，该M个参考信号每个参考信号关联该L个码字中的至少一个码字和该L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，M和L为正整数；处理器610还用于控制通信接口620接收第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示该L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V是小于或等于L的正整数，该第二指示信息为根据该第一设备对该M个参考信号的测量、该L个码字和该L个空间滤波参数确定的。通信接口620用于根据处理器610的控制发送第二配置信息和接收第二指示信息。
应理解，本申请实施例图11中的装置500可以通过图12中的装置600来实现，并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中第一设备以及第二设备对应的各个步骤和/或流程。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例描述的各种设计涉及的方法，流程，操作或者步骤，能够以一一对应的方式，通过计算机软件，电子硬件，或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来一一对应实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件，比如，考虑通用性好成本低软硬件解耦等方面，可以采纳执行程序指令的方式来实现，又比如，考虑系统性能和可靠性等方面，可以采纳使用专用电路来实现。普通技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，此处不做限定。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述实施例中的方法。本申请中的各个实施例也可以互相结合。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述实施例中的方法。
在本申请实施例中，应注意，本申请实施例上述的方法实施例可以应用于处理器中， 或者由处理器实现。处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。RAM有多种不同的类型，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合的方式来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不加赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个物理实体中，也可以是各个单元单独对应一个物理实体，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个物理实体中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。

Claims (34)

  1. 一种用于波束训练的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收用于波束训练的第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，所述M和所述L是正整数；
    发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数，所述第一指示信息是根据所述M个参考信号的测量和所述L个码字确定的。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括M个第一字段，所述M个第一字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号相关联的码字。
  3. 根据权要求1或2所述方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
    所述第一指示信息包括所述V个码字的索引，所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100001
    或
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100002
    其中，R m为所述第m个参考信号关联的码字数量，m＝1，2，……，M。
  4. 根据权利要求权要求1至3中任一项所述方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
    所述第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参考信号关联的码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字的索引，所述W个参考信号为所述M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100003
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示所述V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，根据如下假设对所述第m个参考信号进行测量，m＝1，2，……，M；
    所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据s 1确定的；和/或，
    所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据t i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100004
  8. 一种用于波束训练的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收用于波束训练的第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的 至少一个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，所述M和所述L为正整数；
    发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示所述L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V为小于或等于L的正整数，所述第二指示信息是根据对所述M个参考信号的测量、所述L个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数确定的。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二配置信息包括M个第二字段，所述M个第二字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号配置相关联的空间滤波参数和相关联的码字。
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息指示所述V个空间滤波参数对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个。
  11. 根据权利要求8至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，根据如下假设对所述第m个参考信号进行测量，m＝1，2，……，M；
    所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据Σb i×s 1确定的，i＝1，2，……，R m；和/或，
    所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据Σt ib i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数，b i为所述第m个参考信号关联的第i个空间滤波参数。
  12. 根据权利要求8至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m和关联的空间滤波参数的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于或等于L的正整数，m为小于或等于M的正整数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100005
  13. 一种用于波束训练的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送用于波束训练的第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，所述M和所述L是正整数；
    接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，V是小于或等于L的正整数。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括M个第一字段，所述M个第一字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号相关联的码字。
  15. 根据权要求13或14所述方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
    所述第一指示信息包括所述V个码字的索引，所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的第i个码字的索引为：
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100006
    或
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100007
    其中，R m为所述第m个参考信号关联的码字数量，m＝1，2，……，M。
  16. 根据权利要求权要求13至15中任一项所述方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息指示所述L个码字中的V个码字，具体为：
    所述第一指示信息指示W个参考信号的索引，以及，与所述W个参考信号中每个参 考信号关联的码字的索引，其中，所述W个参考信号中的第w个参考信号关联v w个码字的索引，所述W个参考信号为所述M个参考信号中的参考信号，v w为正整数，且
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100008
  17. 根据权利要求13至16中任一项所述方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示所述V个码字对应的第一幅度信息或第一能量信息中的至少一个。
  18. 根据权利要求13至17中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，根据如下准则发送所述第m个参考信号，m＝1，2，……，M；
    所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据s 1确定的；和/或，
    所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据t i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数。
  19. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于等于L的正整数，m为小于等于M的正整数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100009
  20. 一种用于波束训练的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送用于波束训练的第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息配置M个参考信号关联的L个空间滤波参数和L个码字，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字和所述L个空间滤波参数中的至少一个空间滤波参数，所述M和所述L为正整数；
    接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示所述L个空间滤波参数中的V个空间滤波参数，V是小于或等于L的正整数。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二配置信息包括M个第二字段，所述M个第二字段分别用于承载所述M个参考信号配置相关联的空间滤波参数和相关联的码字。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息指示所述V个空间滤波参数对应的第二幅度信息或第二能量信息中的至少一个。
  23. 根据权利要求20至22中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号的第m个参考信号包括两个端口，根据如下准则发送第m个参考信号，m＝1，2，……，M；
    所述两个端口中的第一端口的发送信号是根据Σb i×s 1确定的，i＝1，2，……，R m；和/或，
    所述两个端口中的第二端口的发送信号是根据Σt ib i×s 2确定的，t i与所述第m个参考信号的第i个码字关联，i＝1，2，……，R m；其中，s 1、s 2是根据所述两个端口的参考信号序列确定的复数，b i为所述第m个参考信号关联的第i个空间滤波参数。
  24. 根据权利要求20至23中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二配置信息包括所述M个参考信号中第m个参考信号关联的码字的数量R m和关联的空间滤波参数的数量R m，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，R m为小于或等于L的正整数， m为小于或等于M的正整数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100010
  25. 根据权利要求7或12或19或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
    所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i)确定的，其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m；α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数常数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100011
  26. 根据权利要求7或12或19或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述R m配置所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字，具体为：
    所述R m、参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的R m个码字。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述R m、所述参考信号数量M用于确定所述第m个参考信号关联的码字，具体为：
    所述第m个参考信号关联的所述R m个码字中的第i个码字是根据t i＝A×exp(j×x i+j×θ m)确定的，θ m为[0,2π]的值，且θ m是与m和M相关的值，α为[0,2π]的常数，A为复数，
    Figure PCTCN2021106454-appb-100012
    其中，x i＝α+2π(i-1)/R m，i＝1，2，……，R m。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，
    θ m＝2mπ/Y，其中，Y为大于或等于M和max m R m的质数，max m R m表示R 1,R 2,……,R M的最大值；或者，
    若R 1＝R 2＝……＝R M＝R，则θ m＝2mπ/MR，m＝1，2，……，M。
  29. 根据权利要求1至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字，具体为：
    所述M个参考信号中，存在至少一个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少两个码字。
  30. 根据权利要求1至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号中每个参考信号关联所述L个码字中的至少一个码字各不相同。
  31. 根据权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个参考信号为M个CSI-RS。
  32. 一种用于波束训练的装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行权利要求1至31中任一项方法的单元。
  33. 一种用于波束训练的装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令，以实现如权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法。
  34. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被运行时，实现如权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/106454 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 用于波束训练的方法和装置 Ceased WO2022017250A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21846010.3A EP4178294A4 (en) 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 BEAM LEARNING METHOD AND APPARATUS
JP2023504006A JP7516655B2 (ja) 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 ビームトレーニング方法及び装置
US18/006,053 US20230283337A1 (en) 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 Beam Training Method and Apparatus
CN202180027892.2A CN115516964B (zh) 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 用于波束训练的方法和装置

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010699812 2020-07-20
CN202010699812.5 2020-07-20
CN202011568911.6 2020-12-25
CN202011568911.6A CN113966000B (zh) 2020-07-20 2020-12-25 用于波束训练的方法和装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022017250A1 true WO2022017250A1 (zh) 2022-01-27

Family

ID=79460234

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/106454 Ceased WO2022017250A1 (zh) 2020-07-20 2021-07-15 用于波束训练的方法和装置

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20230283337A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4178294A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7516655B2 (zh)
CN (2) CN113966000B (zh)
WO (1) WO2022017250A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111194533B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2022-06-24 弗劳恩霍夫应用研究促进协会 用于向一个或多个用户传送数据的设备及方法
CN111901880A (zh) * 2020-06-24 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信息指示方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN114070370B (zh) * 2020-08-03 2025-03-25 维沃移动通信有限公司 波束训练方法、装置、终端设备及网络设备
CN118140559A (zh) * 2021-10-29 2024-06-04 高通股份有限公司 减少资源消耗参考信号的信道状态反馈
CN116633479A (zh) * 2022-02-09 2023-08-22 华为技术有限公司 波束训练方法及通信装置
EP4492891A4 (en) * 2022-03-08 2025-04-16 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and device for determining radiation
CN116846441A (zh) * 2022-03-24 2023-10-03 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 赋形通道的确定方法、设备、装置以及存储介质
US20250080180A1 (en) * 2023-09-05 2025-03-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Network-assisted beamforming

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107171705A (zh) * 2017-05-08 2017-09-15 东南大学 数模混合通信中的联合模拟波束及用户调度方法
CN107294568A (zh) * 2016-03-30 2017-10-24 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 一种窄带信道状态信息参考信号的波束构造方法及装置
US20200007222A1 (en) * 2018-06-29 2020-01-02 Intel IP Corporation Method and apparatus for coherent receive beamforming

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102237944A (zh) * 2010-04-23 2011-11-09 松下电器产业株式会社 码分复用方法及利用该方法的发送设备和接收设备
EP2897305A1 (en) * 2014-01-21 2015-07-22 Alcatel Lucent Apparatuses, Methods and Computer Programs for a Base Station Transceiver and a Mobile Transceiver
WO2016044994A1 (zh) * 2014-09-23 2016-03-31 华为技术有限公司 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备
CN107395259B (zh) * 2016-05-13 2020-04-21 华为技术有限公司 一种二级预编码方法及装置
CN107733493B (zh) * 2016-08-10 2021-02-12 华为技术有限公司 用于确定预编码矩阵的方法和装置
WO2018137397A1 (zh) * 2017-01-26 2018-08-02 华为技术有限公司 一种配置信息的方法、装置及系统
CN108365935B (zh) * 2017-01-26 2020-01-03 华为技术有限公司 一种参考信号配置方法、基站和终端
CN109150439B (zh) * 2017-06-16 2021-02-05 电信科学技术研究院 一种数据传输方法、装置、网络侧设备和用户设备
WO2019028860A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Qualcomm Incorporated SCALABLE METHOD FOR BEAM SELECTION INDICATION
WO2019028878A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Qualcomm Incorporated TECHNIQUES FOR NON-NULL POWER BEAMS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS
CN110034788B (zh) * 2018-01-12 2021-12-28 华为技术有限公司 信道状态信息的测量方法和装置
CN110943943B (zh) * 2018-09-21 2022-07-26 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种信道状态信息的确定方法及装置
CN110401476B (zh) * 2019-08-05 2022-07-08 东南大学 一种基于码本的毫米波通信多用户并行波束训练方法

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107294568A (zh) * 2016-03-30 2017-10-24 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 一种窄带信道状态信息参考信号的波束构造方法及装置
CN107171705A (zh) * 2017-05-08 2017-09-15 东南大学 数模混合通信中的联合模拟波束及用户调度方法
US20200007222A1 (en) * 2018-06-29 2020-01-02 Intel IP Corporation Method and apparatus for coherent receive beamforming

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Details of QCL assumptions and related RS design considerations", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 NR AD HOC MEETING; R1-1700072, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP),SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, 16 January 2017 (2017-01-16), Spokane, USA; 20170116 - 20170120, XP051207614 *
See also references of EP4178294A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115516964A (zh) 2022-12-23
JP2023534533A (ja) 2023-08-09
JP7516655B2 (ja) 2024-07-16
CN115516964B (zh) 2025-02-25
CN113966000A (zh) 2022-01-21
EP4178294A1 (en) 2023-05-10
EP4178294A4 (en) 2024-01-10
CN113966000B (zh) 2025-04-04
US20230283337A1 (en) 2023-09-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022017250A1 (zh) 用于波束训练的方法和装置
WO2020238471A1 (zh) 信息反馈方法及装置、信息接收方法及装置、信息获取方法及装置、通信节点、存储介质
CN111586846A (zh) 传输配置编号状态指示的方法和通信装置
CN115699652B (zh) 用于改进信道估计的自适应探测参考信号映射
CN114616864B (zh) 一种上行传输的方法、设备及存储介质
WO2018137486A1 (zh) 一种码本反馈方法和装置
CN112312557B (zh) 一种发送和接收调度请求的方法及通信装置
CN110149714B (zh) 一种上行传输方法、用户设备及网络设备
WO2020024299A1 (zh) 资源使用状况的上报方法及通信装置
WO2021159528A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
WO2024208299A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
CN112014809A (zh) 雷达测试方法及装置
CN119213722A (zh) 用于无线通信和感测的资源分配
US20250062819A1 (en) Fast beam selection via user equipment receive beam selection reporting
CN117042135A (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2023087186A1 (zh) 一种信道测量方法及其装置
US20250310159A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting configuration information of reference signal and method and device for receiving configuration information of reference signal
WO2025157040A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置及系统
WO2026067801A1 (zh) 干扰测量方法及装置
WO2025261102A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2025214123A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和通信装置
WO2025232151A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及相关装置
CN120857279A (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2023125833A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
WO2025086259A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21846010

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023504006

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202317004557

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021846010

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230131

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 202180027892.2

Country of ref document: CN

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 202317004557

Country of ref document: IN